FCTP
FCTP
A380 (FCTP)
00 - GENERAL INFORMATION
00-TOCgeneral.fm
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Page 2
A380 (FCTP)
00-TOCgeneral.fm
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Page 1
A380 (FCTP)
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM REASON FOR CHANGE Issue 05 FEB 2009
GENERAL INFORMATION
Organzation of the 00-01 p 2, 3, 4 04 05
manual
List of Normal 00-02 p.1 04
Revision
+ minor
corrections and
improvement
Filing.fm
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Page 2
A380 (FCTP)
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM REASON FOR CHANGE Issue 05 FEB 2009
+ minor
corrections and
improvement
+ minor
corrections and
improvement
Filing.fm
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Page 3
A380 (FCTP)
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM REASON FOR CHANGE Issue 05 FEB 2009
Skill Test
02.07.01 p. 1, 2, 3, 4 03 05 In the
introduction :
addition of
paragraph
C. Conducting
the session
+ minor
corrections and
improvement
+ minor
corrections and
improvement
Filing.fm
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Page 4
A380 (FCTP)
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM REASON FOR CHANGE Issue 05 FEB 2009
Filing.fm
GENERAL INFORMATION
00-00.fm
GENERAL INFORMATION 00.00 Page 2
A380
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
00.00
00-00.fm
GENERAL INFORMATION 00.01 Page 1
A380
ORGANIZATION OF THE MANUAL
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
00.01ORGANIZATION OF THE MANUAL
01 - FOREWORD
The Flight Crew Training Program (FCTP) is the support documentation for Flight Crew
instructors ONLY.
The FCTP is sent to each Customer Airline's Flight Operation Department and is updated via
a "Revision Service".
The extract of FCTP dedicated to trainees is called “trainee’s booklet” : it includes the training
session preparation and syllabi, with the relevant support documents (Airbus Training Airport
Jeppesen charts and cockpit panels).
02 - CONTENTS
The FCTP includes all the Flight Crew courses offered by the Airbus Training Centres.
Within each course the sessions are presented using the same format with :
- The takeoff data and session syllabus based on Airbus Airport
- The session preparation
- The session guide
03 - NORMAL REVISIONS
They are issued periodically to cover changes and / or to add new data.
One document added to each revision facilitates its incorporation :
• The "Reason for change" sheet : it lists the pages to be removed or inserted.
Normal revisions are recorded in the "List of Normal Revisions" section.
04 - TEMPORARY REVISIONS
They are printed on yellow paper and are issued when justifying urgent action between
normal revisions.
Temporary revisions are recorded in the "List of Temporary Revisions" section.
00-01.fm
GENERAL INFORMATION 00.01 Page 2
A380
ORGANIZATION OF THE MANUAL
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
00.01
05 - PAGINATION
02.00 Page #
LANGUAGE ADAPTED COURSE
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
Issue 01 JUL 2006
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
Chapter title
Section title
1. Aircraft codes
B = A310 E = A320 F = A340-300 G = A330
D = A300-600 H = A321 C = A340-600 L = A380
J = A319
Revision number
Revision date
A revision bar in front of a line indicates that the line has been revised
A revision bar in front of the page number indicates that the whole page has been revised.
00-01.fm
GENERAL INFORMATION 00.01 Page 3
A380
ORGANIZATION OF THE MANUAL
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
00.01
All m anual holders and users are encouraged to forward their questions
and suggestions regarding the Flight C rew T raining Program using the following
C O M M EN TS - Q U ESTIO N S - SU G G ESTIO N S sheet.
By postm ail : A IR B U S TR A IN IN G C EN TR E
Training and Flight O perations Support and Services
5 rue G abriel C lerc
31707 BLAG N AC C ED EX - FR AN C E
AT T N . : FC T P Supervisor
By fax : 33.(0)5.62.11.07.40
AT T N . : FC T P Supervisor
C ustom er ID :
N am e : First nam e :
D ate : Airline :
Aircraft type :
FC TP reference :
Q uestions / Suggestions :
00-01.fm
GENERAL INFORMATION 00.01 Page 4
A380
ORGANIZATION OF THE MANUAL
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
00.01
00-01.fm
GENERAL INFORMATION 00.02 Page 1
A380
LIST OF NORMAL REVISIONS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
00.02LIST OF NORMAL REVISIONS
00-02.fm
GENERAL INFORMATION 00.02 Page 2
A380
LIST OF NORMAL REVISIONS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
00.02
00-02.fm
GENERAL INFORMATION 00.03 Page 1
A380
LIST OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
00.03LIST OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS
ENTRY INTO
TR ISSUE DATE IN LOCATION
SERVICE DATE
00-03.fm
GENERAL INFORMATION 00.03 Page 2
A380
LIST OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
00.03
00-03.fm
FLIGHT CREW STANDARDADAPTEDFIRST TYPE RATING ON
MULTI-PILOT AIRPLANE TRANSITION COURSE
02.01 - INTRODUCTION
02-00.fm
FLIGHT CREW TRANSITION COURSE 02.00 Page 2
A380 L F2S
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.00
02-00.fm
TRANSITION COURSES 02.01 Page 1
A380 L F2S
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.01INTRODUCTION
01 - GENERAL
b. Learning by doing :
Practical systems training is progressively introduced with the implementation of the
Standard Operating Procedures (SOP’s), crew concept and task sharing in a close to
real environment using the MFTD (Maintenance and Flight Training Device)
functionality.
c. Training to proficiency :
At the end of the training program, the crew must be able of carrying out their tasks
safely and efficiently, in accordance with the training objectives. Therefore, it is not pos-
sible to permit a trainee to move up from one phase to the next until he has acquired the
skills necessary to complete the objectives.
NOTE : CRM (Crew Resource Management) is fully integrated in the Type Rating courses.
B. PREREQUISITES
(Defined by clause 16 in aircraft purchase contract.)
In order to ensure consistent proficiency at the end of the course, minimum experience is
required for entry. The prerequisites listed below are the minimum requirements specified
for Airbus Training.
The entry level prerequisites for the Type Rating courses are mandatory. If pilots do not
meet these prerequisites, Airbus Training may provide ELT (Entry Level Training approved
by Airbus Training) at Customer's request.
If the appropriate regulatory agency and/or specific airline policy demands greater or
additional requirements, they will also apply as prerequisites.
02-01.fm
TRANSITION COURSES 02.01 Page 2
A380 L F2S
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
a. Captain Prerequisites
Previously qualified on JAR / FAR 25 turbojet aircraft equipped with glass cockpit tech-
nology including FMS and commercial operations.
• Valid and current ATPL,
• Previous command experience,
• Jet experience,
• Fluent in English 1,
• Flight time :
- 1 500 hours as pilot,
- 1 000 hours on JAR / FAR 25 aircraft,
- 200 hours experience as airline, corporate or military transport pilot.
If prerequisites are not fulfilled, the trainee’s file will be studied on a case by case
basis, and a training proposal will be given by Airbus Training.
C. REGULATION REFERENCES
The course and skill test have been designed taking into account the following regulation
references.
- ICAO - Annex 1 Personnel licensing
- French DGAC - Arrêté du 29 mars 1999 (FCL 1) modifié relatif aux licences et
qualifications de membre d’équipage de conduite avion
- JAR-FCL1
- FAR 121
- FAR 142
1. When the Trainee does not speak English or is not fluent enough to follow our Standard course he
will follow the Language Adapted course (specific language adaptation).
02-01.fm
TRANSITION COURSES 02.01 Page 3
A380 L F2S
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
A. TRANSITION COURSES
• The Standard transition course is the basic transition course
The HUD OPTION includes CBT that must be completed prior to the HUD
Familiarization FFS session (after FFS 1 of standard transition course).
FFS 2 to FFS 7, LVO and Skill Test are then conducted with the HUD deployed.
• The Language Adapted course is designed from the Standard course and consists of :
- Projected CBT with an instructor,
- Extra MFTD (Maintenance & Flight Training Device) and simulator sessions
(spare sessions). TBD
B. FAMILIARIZATION COURSE
Same Type Rating permits the carry-over of total credit for crew qualifying from one variant
of aircraft type to another, based on common cockpit and flight characteristics.
It allows pilots to get a single type rating to fly all the variants of a same aircraft family,
provided they performed the relevant Familiarization Course :
03 - COURSE ORGANISATION
A. DESCRIPTION
The instruction concept applied by Airbus uses a program divided into phases.
Airbus Airport is used for most of the sessions.
a. Ground phase
• Welcome briefing (day 0) : general introduction presenting :
- Airbus Training Center
- Course description
- Airbus electronic documentation
• Airbus Procedure Pilots Interactions (APPI) module :
This presentation is given on day 6 and explains that a safe and efficient flight can be
achieved by a good interaction between aircraft cockpit, procedures and pilots.
02-01.fm
TRANSITION COURSES 02.01 Page 4
A380 L F2S
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
The content is :
I. Airbus cockpit philosophy
II. Airbus procedures
III. Pilots : identifiy and understand some human behaviours (individual and collective)
that are likely to induce risk in operational situation.
IV. Aircrat cockpit, Procedures, Pilots Interactions : illustrate how
- Airbus cockpit
- Airbus procedure
- Pilots
Interact in real life through operational scenario.
02-01.fm
TRANSITION COURSES 02.01 Page 5
A380 L F2S
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
This master slide should be enough to conduct the exercise, but if necessary, trainees
or instructor can access to any level of tutorial information for knowledge reinforce-
ment.
The briefings (also referred to as Q&A : Questions & Answers), and debriefings are
fully integrated in each MFTD session.
A debriefing will be carried out at MFTD 7 (Progress Check), according to trainee per-
formance
GSI may run MFTD A, B, C and D. SFI may run all MFTD sessions.
4. CABIN
• Doors and slides operations are presented in the CBT by means of videos and in a
cabin training device.
b. Handling phase
This phase using FFS (Full Flight Simulator) is mostly dedicated to aircraft handling in
Normal and Abnormal operations. All exercises are completed in a realistic environment
and allows the crew to practice Standard Operating Procedures previously learnt in the
MFTD.
Briefing guides (DVD 1) are used to brief FFS sessions.
SFI may run all sessions.
c. ALOFT phase
A ALOFT (Airbus Line Oriented Flight Training) session is defined to summarize all the
exercises learnt throughout the course and to give the trainee experience in operating
the aircraft in real time scenarii.
ALOFT are conducted by TRI / E
02-01.fm
TRANSITION COURSES 02.01 Page 6
A380 L F2S
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
B. INSTRUCTOR BRIEFING
The instructor will make a briefing whose duration is stated in the table below within a
reasonnable time frame before FFS session :
C. TRAINING DOCUMENTATION
02-01.fm
TRANSITION COURSES 02.01 Page 7
A380 L F2S
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
-CFIT
DVD2
-REJECTED TAKE OFF
VIDEO BRIEFINGS
-UPSET RECOVERY
(To be given)
-COCKPIT DOORS
PAPER CONTENT
-RELEVANT CREW COURSE
TRAINEE’S BOOKLET -BASE TRAINING SYLLABI
(extract of FCTP: -AIRBUS TRAINING AIRPORT JEPPESEN CHARTS
Flight Crew Training Program) (For Airbus Training Centres ONLY)
-Set of 4 coloured cockpit panels
Extract of QRH
-SMOKE and EVACUATION procedures
(Quick Reference Handbook)
02-01.fm
TRANSITION COURSES 02.01 Page 8
A380 L F2S
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.01
04 - CRITERIA OF PROFICIENCY
b. Unsatisfactory Examination :
Additional training using the CBT will be determined by the instructor in coordination
with Airbus Training Director. The student will then undertake an additional CBT exami-
nation.
Three boxes are used to record the overall trainee’s performance using “Trainee’s Record”
file (see page 10 / page 11)
They are quoted “Satisfactory”, “May need extra training” or “Unsatisfactory”
• When both “Satisfactory” and “May need extra training” boxes are ticked
----> comments are required, and the following session must be assessed as :
Additional training sessions (see page 16) have to be commented and use the same
identification as the session involved.
02-01.fm
STANDARD COURSE (LF2S)
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
GROUND PHASE Trainee
A380 sticker
SATISFACTORY
02.01 02.01 EMER2
MFTD A
Code |____|____|____|
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
MFTD B
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
MFTD C
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
MFTD D
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
INTRODUCTION
MFTD 1
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
TRANSITION COURSES
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
MFTD 2
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
MFTD 3
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
02.01
L F2S
* : - Comments are mandatory when May need extra training box is ticked * *The following session MUST be assessed as SATISFACTORY or UNSATISFACTORY
- Write None if no specific comments are needed
Page 9
02-01.fm
STANDARD COURSE (LF2S)
02-01.fm
02.01
A380 sticker
(Refer to relevant PIR when ticked) UNSATISFACTORY
A380
SATISFACTORY
Trainee Instructor name
Sessions Date Comments*
signature and signature
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
MFTD 4
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
MFTD 5
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
MFTD 6
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
* : - Comments are mandatory when May need extra training box is ticked * *The following session MUST be assessed as SATISFACTORY or UNSATISFACTORY
- Write None if no specific comments are needed
Page 10
SATISFACTORY
Trainee Instructor name
Sessions Date Comments*
signature and signature
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
FFS 1
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
FFS 2
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
FFS 3
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
FFS 4
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
INTRODUCTION
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
FFS 5
TRANSITION COURSES
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
FFS 6
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
02.01
L F2S
* : - Comments are mandatory when May need extra training box is ticked * *The following session MUST be assessed as SATISFACTORY or UNSATISFACTORY
- Write None if no specific comments are needed
Page 11
02-01.fm
STANDARD COURSE (LF2S)
02-01.fm
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
ALOFT & SKILL TEST SESSIONS Trainee
A380 sticker
(Refer to relevant PIR when ticked) UNSATISFACTORY
A380
SATISFACTORY
Trainee Instructor name
Date (DD/MM/YYYY) Comments*
signature and signature
Scenario : ❐ 1 ❐2 ❐3 ❐4 Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
|____|____| / |____|____| /
Code |____|____|____|
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
ALOFT
|____|____|____|____|
|____|____|____|____|
RE-ALOFT
(Refer to relevant PIR when ticked) UNSATISFACTORY
SATISFACTORY
Trainee s Instructor s name
Date (DD/MM/YYYY) Comments*
signature and signature
INTRODUCTION
(Please write the JAR references for UNSATISFACTORY items) defined in the FCTP
|____|____| / |____|____| /
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
SKILLTEST
|____|____|____|____| Code |____|____|____|
|____|____| / |____|____| /
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
RE-SKTEST
|____|____|____|____| Code |____|____|____|
SATISFACTORY
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
HUD
FAMILIARIZATION
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
INTRODUCTION
02.01 TRANSITION COURSES
L F2S
Issue 05
Page 13
FEB 2009
02-01.fm
STANDARD COURSE (LF2S)
02-01.fm
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
BASE TRAINING
Trainee
A380 sticker
(Refer to relevant PIR when ticked) UNSATISFACTORY
A380
BASE TRAINING
INTRODUCTION
02.01 TRANSITION COURSES
L F2S
or
02-01.fm
STANDARD COURSE (LF2S)
02-01.fm
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
ADDITIONAL TRAINING SESSIONS Trainee
A380 sticker
UNSATISFACTORY
A380
SATISFACTORY
Trainee Instructor name
Session* Date (DD/MM/YYYY) Comments
signature and signature
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
Code |____|____|____|
❐ Spare
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
|____|____| MFTD
|____|____|____|____|
or
|____|____| FFS
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
Code |____|____|____|
❐ Spare
|____|____| MFTD
|____|____|____|____|
or
|____|____| FFS
INTRODUCTION
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
TRANSITION COURSES
Code |____|____|____|
❐ Spare
|____|____| MFTD
|____|____|____|____|
or
|____|____| FFS
|
02.01
L F2S
02-02.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.02 Page 2
A380 L F2S
TRAINING FOOTPRINT
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02 - STANDARD COURSE
Note : To follow your course, please DO NOT respect the workstation CBT ATA numerical order but follow the
ATA chapter in the same order as presented in the present footprint table.
Timing is given for information : your rate of progress could be different from the standard one, however make
sure that the systems study associated to 1 day has been completed before the next day.
Day 0: Administration 1:00 - Welcome briefing: 1:30 - E-doc briefing: 1:00
02-02.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 1
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
MFTD A (COCKPIT AND SYSTEMS PRESENTATION)
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ CALM 9999 13/12 1013
LFLL CALM 9999 10/8 1013 INIT TAKE OFF - LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
Co-route AIBLYS
ACTIVE / INIT
FLT NBR A/L ID 101 REFER TO SESSION GUIDE
385 t 65 t
GW FOB
847 000 Ib 143 000 Ib
320t
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 Ib
NOTES
RWY COND DRY FPLN : REFER CO ROUTE
AIR COND ON (SID ONZON 1N)
ANTI ICE OFF PAX NUMBER : 303
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 126 TOGA V1 125 TOGA
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftdA.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 2
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
mftdA.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 2A
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• To demonstrate the use of the training device.
• To present a general view of the cockpit including flight instruments and major aircraft
systems controls and indications.
• To present the Less Paper Cockpit philosophy
mftdAgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 2B
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
MFTD INITIALIZATION :
• The instructor completes the MFTD set up.
• INIT TAKE OFF at Airbus Airport
External power 2 and 3 : ON
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
SESSION GUIDE :
NOTE :
Do not explain Airbus aircraft systems but present the following according to the
trainee's aeronautical background by introducing the Airbus cockpit philosophy.
Remember that, at this stage, the trainee did not study all aircraft systems.
C. FMS :
MFD + KCCU : show only that KCCU is the unit to use for interaction on pages displayed on
MFD (Multi Function Display). Explain that KCCU doesn’t interact with ECAM only ECP can
do it.
D. OIS :
- Less paper cockpit philosophy
- FLT OPS STS
- FLT OPS Menu
• T.O. PERF
• LOAD SHEET
• LDG PERF
• IN-FLT PERF
• OPS LIBRARY
- Don’t explain all the applications: this will be done during the Performance course.
mftdAgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 2C
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
- EFIS
PFD : Flight parameters + memos (3 lines max) and limitations (8 lines max displaying
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
limitations that have a direct impact on A/C flight performances)
ND : Flight navigation information + vertical display zone
- ECAM
E/WD : engine primary parameters + bottom part :
- Normal C/L (requested by the flight crew via the ECP)
- Abnormal and emergency procedures (requested by the flight crew via the ECP)
- Alerts
- Limitations (left column : ALL PHASES / right column : APPR & LDG)
- Memos (left column : TO and LDG memos / right column : all other memos)
SD :
- Displays automatically the system page corresponding to 1 of the 12 flight phases.
- Explain flight phase inhibition
-
3 zones :
- System display page (with MORE info on WHEEL, FUEL, STS pages)
- Permanent data (TAT, SAT, ISA, time, GW, GWCG, FOB)
- ATC mailbox
ECP :
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Explain briefly hard keys functions
mftdAgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 2D
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
- C/L completed indication: Color coding (blue when C/L not completed / grey when com-
pleted)
- C/L RESET indication
- STS indication
- C/L CLEAR bar
INIT FL 100
1. Explain alerts philosophy and procedure automatically displayed on ECAM
(sensed procedure)
• Alerts levels and priority rules : advisory then levels 1,2,3
• Failure types : independent, primary, secondary
• Color coding (red, amber, green, white, blue, magenta, grey)
2. Explain ABN PROC activated manually on ECAM by the crew (Not-Sensed procedures)
• Associated Alert Level
• Not activated : differences of color coding
• When activated, transferred into the ECAM and update of STS and limitations
Note : Explain that some failures are not detected by ECAM but directly on the interface itself
(eg : VHF failure displayed on RMP).
Insert the following failures in sequence without applying ECAM actions. The purpose is to
demonstrate alerts levels, priority rules, failures types and color coding.
mftdAgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 2E
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Restore all systems
Explain :
- Alert types (independent, primary, secondary)
- Items detected / not detected by ECAM (preceeded by a square to be ticked) : same color
coding as above. Explain that any action ticked inadvertently is reversible by unticking it
- Overflow arrow
- MORE indication on STS page. All the ECAM alerts which have an impact on the landing
performance are listed in the "ALERT IMPACTING LDG PERF" part of the MORE STS
PAGE.
The flight crew selects the applicable ECAM alert(s) in the OIS LDG PERF application to
compute LDG DIST and/or VAPP.
Point out that 3 indications may be displayed as applicable on the MORE page:
INOP SYS REDUND,
ALERTS IMPACTING LDG PERF,
CANCELLED CAUTION
- Deferred procedure (ALL PHASES, or APP & LDG) : appears in the C/L menu (amber
when not completed / white when completed).
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Explain FAILURE PENDING INDICATION
If an alert or ABN PROC is displayed but has not been cleared, a FAILURE PENDING mes-
sage appears on the E/WD, when the crew displays a C/L (ex : APPROACH)
When the C/L and the C/L menu are cleared, the alert or the not sensed ABN PROC reap-
pears on the E/WD and the message disappears.
mftdAgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 2F
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
mftdAgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 3
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
MFTD B (FMS) - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 040/10 3000 OVC 010 15/10 1010
BIKF 030/10 3000 OVC 005 12/10 1010 INIT TAKE OFF - LFZZ 33R GW 385 t
Co-route AIBKEF
ACTIVE / INIT
FLT NBR A/L ID 102 1 - MFD ARCHITECTURE
- MFD SYSTEM MENU
FROM LFZZ TO BIKF ALTN EINN - MFD GENERAL MENU BAR
CPNY RTE AIBKEF - USE OF KCCU AND HARD KEYS
2 - FMS INITIALIZATION
ALTN RTE KEFSNN - INIT - STATUS
- IRS
CRZ FL FL 360 CRZ TEMP -55°C - DEPARTURE
CI 90 TROPO 36090 - NAVAIDS
- FUEL & LOAD
TRIP WIND TL20 - T.O PERF
- SEC
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD
385 t 65 t
GW FOB
847 000 Ib 143 000 Ib
320t
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 Ib
NOTES
RWY COND DRY FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE
AIR COND ON (SID ATN 1N)
ANTI ICE OFF PAX NUMBER : 300
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 126 TOGA V1 125 TOGA
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftdB.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 4
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
NOTES
RWY COND DRY FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE
AIR COND ON (SID ATN 1N)
ANTI ICE OFF PAX NUMBER : 300
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftdB.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 4A
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.0302.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Introduction to FMS architecture & design of interfaces.
• Study and practice initialization and use of the FMS through a standard preparation
sequence.
• Practice FMS functions through flight phases.
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
Not applicable.
B. NEW EXERCICES :
• FMS ARCHITECTURE : FMS / ATC COM / SURV / FCU BKUP
• FMS MENU : ACTIVE / POSITION / SEC / DATA
• ACTIVE MENU : F-PLN / PERF / FUEL & LOAD / WIND / INIT
• POSITION MENU
• SEC MENU
• DATA MENU
• FMS FLIGHT PHASES
• FMS REVISIONS
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCOM
• FCTM
D. REFERENCES :
• FCOM /Aircraft Systems /ATA22-AFS-Flight Management System/ System Description
• FCOM /Aircraft Systems /ATA22-AFS-Flight Management System/ System Description /
Flight Planning
• KCCU / Controls & Indicators
mftdBgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 4B
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
Standard crew : captain is trainee 1 and first officer is trainee 2 throughout the
course (from MFTD B to FFS 7).
Non standard crew : instructor determines Trainee 1 and Trainee 2 for first session,
and maintains it throughout the course.
General recommandation :
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
2 . - Explain that the sequence of the INIT is ensured thanks to the automatic cursor
jump from one field to another. This process has been designed to support the crew
in initialising the F-PLN and must be used. Highlight the fact that this automatic cur-
sor jump is not available on the fields that are not often used (eg. CRZ temp, tropo-
pause, THR RED, ACCEL...): to recover the cursor jump, re-insert the value by
default
- INIT hard key : press
- STATUS : explain the page and don’t go to FMS P/N
- INIT : Do not explain all the REQUEST options
- IRS : Show the option to "ALIGN ON OTHER REF"
- DEPARTURE :
F-PLN review according to the electronic F-PLN (or co-route) or to the charts,
using the RTE SUMMARY function
- NAVAIDS
Show TUNED FOR DISPLAY
Show the TUNED FOR FMS NAV : how to deselect NAVAIDS
mftdBgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 4C
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
2 end : - SEC
SEC 1 : import "FROM ACTIVE"
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
SEC 2 : import "FROM ACTIVE" and modify the runway for departure (RWY 24)
Note : During aircraft initialization, highlight the fact that messages are displayed in
the message pad at the bottom of the MFD : CLEAR INFO pb is used to clear the
messages.
Reinforce how to modifiy or clear a field : BACKSPACE + ENTER
Reinforce how to recover the cursor when a field is active : ESC
Explain interactivity between MFD, AFS - CP, EFIS - CP, PFD and ND.
Explain FMA philosophy.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
- Show FMA
- Show SPD / HDG / V/S windows dashed on AFS CP
mftdBgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 4D
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
Instructor starts the engines and initializes the aircraft ready for take-off - Initial
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
altitude FL 70 (on AFS CP). During take off, instructor will assist the trainee with
thrust setting and aircraft clean-up
3 : - Freeze as necessary (step by step) to highlight FMA mode changes and PFD
characteristic speed targets.
4 : - During Take-off and climb show the flight phase automatic swichting (PERF page)
- F-PLN : demonstrate how to swap between SPD ALT and EFOB T.WIND. Explain
that lateral and vertical revisions are accessible either by a menu which opens when
clicking on a waypoint or by the menu FPLN INFO. The difference between these 2
possibilities is that the revisions from the menu FPLN INFO are related to the whole
FPLN and the other to a waypoint.
- Demonstrate how to insert speed or altitude constraint either from the F-PLN or
from lateral revision at a waypoint.
5 : - At altitude capture explain FMA changes and automatic flight phase switching
- Explain and use all the lateral and vertical revisions at applicable waypoints. Don’t
spend too much time on lateral or vertical revisions which are not often used and will
be reviewed during IOE (Initial Operating Experience).
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
- POSITION MONITOR : explain the content and highlight where to find the BRG /
DIST TO
- DIRECT TO :
- Use hard key DIR for DIRECT TO demo
- Use DIRECT TO option in F-PLN for DIRECT TO ABEAM demo
- Use lateral revision FROM P.POS DIRECT TO for DIRECT TO CRS IN or OUT
demo
- Demonstrate OFFSET, OVERFLY (DELETE) and waypoint DELETE
Explain the " * " associated to some lateral and vertical revisions.
No " * " means a submenu is available.
" * " means, when clicked, direct access to the function, creating a TMPY FPLN.
Demonstrate the insert next WPT option and insert new destination : LFZZ
mftdBgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 5
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
MFTD C (FMS) - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 330/15 9999 BKN 025 25/12 1010
INIT TAKE OFF - LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftdC.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 6
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftdC.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 6A
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Practice FMS initialization
• Practice FMS functions during a flight sequence with diversion to alternate airport.
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• FMS ARCHITECTURE : FMS / ATC COM / SURV / FCU BKUP
• FMS MENU : ACTIVE / POSITION / SEC / DATA
• ACTIVE MENU : F-PLN / PERF / FUEL & LOAD / WIND / INIT
• POSITION MENU
• SEC MENU
• DATA MENU
• SPEED / ALT CST
• FMS REVISIONS
B. NEW EXERCICES :
• ND INTERACTIVITY
• DESCENT
• ILS APPROACH
• GO AROUND
• HOLDING PATTERN
• ENABLE ALTERNATE
• SEC FPLN
• FMS REVISIONS :
- AIRWAYS
- NAVAIDS DESELECTION
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : Procedure data package (PDP)
• FCOM
• FCTM
mftdCgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 6B
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
D. REFERENCES :
• FCOM /Aircraft Systems /ATA22-AFS-Flight Management System/ System Description
• FCOM /Aircraft Systems /ATA22-AFS-Flight Management System/ System Description /
Flight Planning / Lateral Flight Plan
• FCOM /Aircraft Systems /ATA22-AFS-Flight Management System/ System Description /
Flight Planning / Vertical flight plan
• FCOM /Aircraft Systems /ATA22-AFS-Flight Management System/ System Description /
Flight Planning / Secondary Flight Plans
• FCTM / Normal Operations /
• FCTM / Normal Operations / ILS Approach
mftdCgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 6C
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.03
General recommandation :
Use the freeze function when needed
Don’t teach SOP’s during this MFTD session
Highlight all FMA mode changes and selected / managed philosophy
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
INIT TAKE OFF : Cockpit prepared by instructor
Instructor starts the engines and initializes the aircraft ready for take-off - Initial altitude FL 70
(on AFS CP). During take off, instructor will assist the trainee with thrust setting and aircraft
clean-up
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
4 : - After Take-off provide radar vector and altitude changes to demonstrate the
following :
- Switching from CLB to OPCLB ; altitude constraint not considered
- How to reengage NAV and CLB to respect altitude constraint
- Final cruise altitude : FL 290 explain how to obtain ALT CRZ on FMA
- Demonstrate how to select AIRWAYS in FMS revisions
5 : - Present the PERF CRZ page and explain the different cruise speeds
Instructor assists the trainees for aircraft configuration and during the Go-around
mftdCgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 6D
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
the configuration
Use of approach mode : LOC and G/S interception (FMA).0
Instructor starts the engines and initializes the aircraft ready for take-off - Initial altitude FL 70
(on AFS CP). During take off, instructor will assist the trainee with thrust setting and aircraft
clean-up
11 : After TAKE OFF, show the target selected speed 230 kts on FMA. Explain how to
recover managed speed
16 : - Stabilized approach :
- Select the speed according to the short term managed speed target until VAPP
then manage speed
- Point out the successive configuration change at each short term target speed
in order to respect "establish in full configuration and Vapp at 1000 ft AGL"
mftdCgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 7
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
MFTD D (SYSTEMS REVIEW)
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ CALM 9999 13/12 1013
LFLL CALM 9999 13/12 1013 INIT TAKE OFF - LFZZ 15L - GW 385 t
Co-route AIBLYS
ACTIVE / INIT
FLT NBR A/L ID 104 REFER SESSION GUIDE
385 t 65 t
GW FOB
847 000 Ib 143 000 Ib
320t
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 Ib
NOTES
RWY COND DRY FPLN : REFER CO ROUTE
AIR COND ON (SID ONZON 1S)
ANTI ICE OFF PAX NUMBER : 303
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 15L / GW 385 t LFZZ 15L / GW 385 t
V1 125 TOGA V1 127 TOGA
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftdD.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 8
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
mftdD.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 8A
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• To reinforce systems studied from day 1 to day 4.
• To reinforce FMS system knowledge studied during CBT, MFTD B and C.
- FMS architecture: flight phases.
- FMA (Flight Mode Annunciator).
- Flight director - AFS control panel.
- EFIS control panel
• To introduce:
- Reversion modes
- GROUND SPEED MINI FUNCTION for target speed in approach
mftdDgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 8B
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02 - SESSION GUIDE :
Init Take Off: LFZZ 15L
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
LFZZ/LFLL: Use co route AIBLYS with SID ONZON 1S. Delete ONZON, delete the first
ROA WPT to clear discontinuity. LFLL arrival ILS 18L. Fill the APPR page. ALTN FPLN:
LFLL/LFZZ: Use co route LYSAIB. Change departure RWY 18L with SID EB 4S.
Delete the discontinuity between EB and ROA.
DOOR
• Highlight differences door open (door label amber) and door closed (green).
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
mftdDgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 8C
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
APU
• APU fire test. Explain
• APU start:
• APU master sw ON reinforce auto display of APU SD: Flap moving / Flap open
• APU start pb: ON reinforce GEN A/B connection amber to green parameters / APU
AVAIL on SD, on pb and on EWD memo
• SD DOOR page is displayed automatically after 10"
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
• Select APU page
• Select APU bleed ON: show bleed status change and APU BLEED memo replacing APU
AVAIL on EWD
• Select APU bleed OFF
• Insert APU fire extinguishable: demonstrate APU automatic emergency shutdown and
automatic agent discharge. The ECAM requires actions, wait to demonstrate that if pilots
do not perform ECAM actions, the system does it automatically.
• Restore. Reset systems. Restart APU.
ELEC
AC
• Select EL/AC SD
• Demonstrate that each EXT PWR is connected to its assigned AC bus. Show EXT PWR
memo on EWD
• Demonstrate that EXT PWR has priority over APU GEN
• Switch OFF EXT 1 and 4 and demonstrate
- AC 1 supplied by GEN A
- AC 4 supplied by GEN B
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
• Switch OFF EXT 2 and 3 and demonstrate
- APU GEN A supplying AC 1 and 2
- APU GEN B supplying AC 3 and 4
NOTE: Remove EXT PWR one by one to highlight the SD page changes, and AVAIL green
light disappears on EXT pb.
DC
• Select EL/DC SD
• Observe the ELEC DC distribution
• Explain TR2 B is back up to TR 2A
mftdDgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 8D
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
BLEED
• Select BLEED page
• Select APU bleed ON
• Highlight APU bleed supplying both packs through XBLEED valves on BLEED page. It
takes time (around 45") until hot air valves open, which is normal
• Select PACK 1 OFF: demonstrate pack and hot air valves closure. Highlight the color
coding change. Show on COND page and PRESS page the changes
• Select PACK 1 ON
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
• Select BLEED SD
• Select ENG START sel to IGN / START and observe automatic pack closure
• Select ENG 3 master lever ON : when ENG AVAIL demonstrate automatic pack open.
Select ENG START sel to NORM
• Perform a quick engine start on 1, 2 and 4
• When 4 engines AVAIL, highlight APU BLEED priority on ENGINE BLEEDS
• Open DOOR MAIN 1L
Highlight:
• PACK 1+2 inhibited by door open when engines running
• ECAM alert DOOR OPEN and MAIN 1L in amber on door page
Observe DOOR SD replaced by WHEEL SD after engine start
Highlight differences
• Engines shutdown: DOOR symbol amber only
• Engines running: DOOR symbol amber + DOOR name in amber
• Close the door. Alerts disappear
• ENG BLEED VALVES open. Each engine supplies its associated pack valve
CAB PRESS
mftdDgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 8E
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FMS
The purpose of this part is to reinforce FMS study, through a flight from LFZZ to LFLL.
Reinforce AFS CP UNDERSTANDING
Reinforce EFIS CP UNDERSTANDING
Reinforce FMA on PFD
Reinforce FMS phases switching conditions, and associated speed management.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Take Off to LFLL (20 minutes required) - Select FL 110
• Highlight
• Each phase switching condition
• All FMA changes
• Speed target changes: reinforce all the managed speed changes
• Freeze position and altitude when required to highlight all these changes.
• Keep simulation frozen to brief the mode reversions demo using the tutorial.
During climb, demonstrate all the lateral and vertical reversion modes except FD orders
not followed.
GW: 385 T
Wind in PERF page: 330/20
The purpose is to demonstrate how the target speed changes with wind variation during
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
approach.
The exercice starts at 3700 ft from the FAF ILS 33R:
1 - At 3700 ft, insert WIND 330/10
2 - At 3000 ft, change WIND 330/50
3 - At 2000 ft, change WIND 150/20
4 - At 1000 ft, change WIND 330/20
If necessary between wind changes freeze POS/ALT to highlight the target changes.
mftdDgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 8F
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
mftdDgd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 9
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
385 t 65 t
GW FOB
847 000 Ib 143 000 Ib
320 t
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 Ib
NOTES
RWY COND DRY FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE
AIR COND ON (SID ATN 1N)
ANTI ICE OFF PAX NUMBER : 302
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 v TOGA V1 v TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd1.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 10
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
WEATHER
Time EVENTS
LFZZ 240/10 CAVOK 13/10 1020
LFLL 270/10 CAVOK 13/10 1020 QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
385 t 65 t
GW FOB
847 000 Ib 143 000 Ib
320 t
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 Ib
NOTES
RWY COND DRY FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE
AIR COND ON (SID ONZON 1N)
ANTI ICE OFF PAX NUMBER : 302
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd1.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 10A
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Introduce and practice SOPs and task sharing during :
- COCKPIT PREPARATION
- BEFORE START / ENGINE START / AFTER START
- TAXI & BEFORE TAKE OFF
- TAKE OFF / AFTER TAKE OFF.
- CLIMB
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• Use of FMS through a standard preparation
B. NEW EXERCICES :
• Standard operating procedures during
- COCKPIT PREPARATION
- BEFORE START / ENGINE START / AFTER START
- TAXI & BEFORE TAKE OFF
- TAKE OFF / AFTER TAKE OFF.
- CLIMB
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCOM
• FCTM
D. REFERENCES
• PDP
Normal operations
Cockpit Preparation + Before Start / After Start + Taxi / Before Takeoff + Takeoff + Climb
• FCOM
Standard flight profile - SOP's
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Standard Operating Procedures
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Task Sharing
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Normal Checklists
Use of RMP
- Aircraft Systems / 23 - Communication / How to use the RMP / How to tune a frequency
mftd1gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 10B
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
• FCTM
Normal operations
- Normal Operations / General + Preliminary Cockpit Preparation + Cockpit Preparation +
Before Start + Start + After Start + Taxi + Before Takeoff + Takeoff + Climb + Standard
Callouts
mftd1gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 10C
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.03
USE OF TUTORIAL :
T MANDATORY use of tutorial mode.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
2 - ECAM / LOGBOOK CHECK
3 - APU start
4 - NSS / OIS PREPARATION.
5 - Before WALKAROUND
Cockpit preparation : performed in 2 steps
- Systems checking/setting and FMS preparation (PF). Select TOGA allowing the
demo of METOTS (RR engine only)
- FMS revised by PNF
- Glareshield and Instruments panels checking/setting when both pilots seated
- SURV page : Explain the controls and STATUS & SWITCHING pages
ELEC : Demonstrate the connection logic
- Select EXT 2 : demonstrate that 1 EXT PWR unit is not enough to supply the entire
electrical network
- Select EXT 3 to supply the entire network
APU : Comment APU start using ECAM APU page.
When APU AVAIL, call ECAM ELEC page, point out the priority logic of the EXT
PWR on APU GEN.
- Select EXT 1 and 4 : highlight the changes
FUEL : PUMPS selection MAIN - SBY - Demo SBY - MAIN. Highlight differences
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
When all engines are running, select ECAM ELEC page, to highlight the priority
changes between engine and APU generator
5 : Explain the functionnality of TAXI camera on PFD for taxi + video selection possibil-
ities on SD page.
6 : During take off, point out the following key points. FMA change after take off thrust
setting. 35 kt take off thrust sets "METOTS" on RR only
Explain the evolution of ACUTE during take off :
- METOTS : Modified Engine Take Off Thrust Setting (Use TOGA in order to observe
significant thrust variations)
- After thrust reduction, reference changes from TOGA to GA thrust.
This leads to a small change of THR. If FLEX take off THR is well below CLB THR,
there will be a washout during +/- 20 sec to reach CLB THR.
V1 auto callout
VR
Pitch 12.5°
SRS mode
Thrust reduction
Thrust acceleration - climb phase
mftd1gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 10D
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
mftd1gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 11
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
MFTD 2 (SOP) - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 240/05 CAVOK 13/10 1006
LFLL 270/06 CAVOK 16/10 1006 QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
NOTES
RWY COND DRY FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE
AIR COND ON (SID MOU 1N)
ANTI ICE OFF PAX NUMBER : 350
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd2.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 12
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
NOTES
RWY COND DRY FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE
AIR COND ON (SID MOU 1N)
ANTI ICE OFF PAX NUMBER : 350
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd2.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 12A
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Introduce and practice SOPs and task sharing during :
- CLIMB
- CRUISE
- DESCENT
- ILS APPROACH
- LANDING
- GO AROUND
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• Standard operating procedures during :
- COCKPIT PREPARATION
- BEFORE START / ENGINE START / AFTER START
- TAXI and BEFORE TAKE OFF
- TAKE OFF / AFTER TAKE OFF
- CLIMB
B. NEW EXERCICES :
• Standard operating procedures during :
- CRUISE
- DESCENT
- ILS APPROACH
- LANDING
- GO AROUND
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCOM.
• FCTM
mftd2gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 12B
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
D. REFERENCES :
• PDP
Normal operations
Cockpit Preparation + Before Start / After Start + Taxi / Before Takeoff + Takeoff + Climb +
Cruise + Descent + ILS Approach + Go Around + Landing
• FCOM
Standard flight profile - SOP's
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Standard Operating Procedures
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Task Sharing
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Normal Checklists
Use of RMP
- Aircraft Systems / 23 - Communication / How to use the RMP / How to tune a frequency
• FCTM
Normal operations
- Normal Operations / General + Preliminary Cockpit Preparation + Cockpit Preparation +
Before Start + Start + After Start + Taxi + Before Takeoff + Takeoff + Climb + Cruise +
Descent Preparation + Descent + Approach + ILS Approach + Go Around + Landing +
Standard Callouts
mftd2gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 12C
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
12 : No radar vectors. Decelerated approach via ROA.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
mftd2gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 12D
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
mftd2gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 13
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd3.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 14
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
385 t 65 t
GW FOB
847 000 Ib 143 000 Ib
320 t
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 Ib
NOTES
RWY COND DRY
AIR COND OFF
ANTI ICE OFF PAX NUMBER : 250
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd3.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 14A
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Introduce and practice SOPs and task sharing during :
- NON PRECISION APPROACH
- AFTER LANDING
- PARKING
- SECURING THE AIRCRAFT
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• Standard operating procedures during :
- COCKPIT PREPARATION
- BEFORE START / ENGINE START / AFTER START
- TAXI and BEFORE TAKE OFF
- TAKE OFF / AFTER TAKE OFF
- CLIMB
- CRUISE
- DESCENT
- ILS APPROACH
- LANDING
- GO AROUND
B. NEW EXERCICES :
• Standard operating procedures during :
- NON PRECISION APPROACH
- AFTER LANDING
- PARKING
- SECURING THE AIRCRAFT
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCOM.
• FCTM
mftd3gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 14B
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
D. REFERENCES :
• PDP
Normal operations
Cockpit Preparation + Before Start / After Start + Taxi / Before Takeoff + Takeoff + Climb +
Cruise + Descent + ILS Approach + Non Precision Approach +Go Around + Landing + Park-
ing / Securing the Aircraft
• FCOM
Standard flight profile - SOP's
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Standard Operating Procedures
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Task Sharing
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Normal Checklists
Use of RMP
- Aircraft Systems / 23 - Communication / How to use the RMP / How to tune a frequency
• FCTM
Normal operations
- Normal Operations / General + Preliminary Cockpit Preparation + Cockpit Preparation +
Before Start + Start + After Start + Taxi + Before Takeoff + Takeoff + Climb + Cruise +
Descent Preparation + Descent + Approach + ILS Approach + Non Precision Approach +
Go Around + Landing + Parking + Standard Callouts
Use of MMEL
- Normal Operations / Flight Preparation / MEL
mftd3gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 14C
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.03
10,14: On the IOS, insert GPS PRIMARY lost to get F-APP + RAW. Then, on the POSI-
TION monitor MFD page, insert RNP less than EPU to get NAV ACCU LOW & FLS:
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
RAW only.
16 : Fail G/S.
Demonstrate how to deselect G/S in FMS, in order to fly this approach in LOC - F/GS
Before go around, freeze at MDA-50 ft to demonstrate "DISCONNECT AP FOR
LDG" message on PFD
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
mftd3gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 14D
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
mftd3gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 15
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
340 t
ZFW ZFWCG 33,9 %
748 000 Ib
NOTES
RWY COND DRY FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE
AIR COND OFF (SID ATN 1N)
ANTI ICE OFF PAX NUMBER : 250
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R / GW 423 t LFZZ 33R / GW 423 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd4.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 16
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
423 t 83 t
GW FOB
930 600 Ib 182 600 Ib
340 t
ZFW ZFWCG 33,9 %
748 000 Ib
NOTES
RWY COND DRY FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE
AIR COND OFF (SID ATN 1N)
ANTI ICE OFF PAX NUMBER : 250
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd4.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 16A
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Introduce and practice SOPs and task sharing during :
- FUEL JETTISON
- OVERWEIGHT LANDING PROCEDURE
- DIVERSION
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• Standard operating procedures during :
- COCKPIT PREPARATION
- BEFORE START / ENGINE START / AFTER START
- TAXI and BEFORE TAKE OFF
- TAKE OFF / AFTER TAKE OFF
- CLIMB
- CRUISE
- DESCENT
- ILS APPROACH
- LANDING
- AFTER LANDING
- GO AROUND
- PARKING
- SECURING THE AIRCRAFT
B. NEW EXERCICES :
• Standard operating procedures during :
- FUEL TRANSFER
- FUEL JETTISON
- DIVERSION
- OVERWEIGHT LANDING PROCEDURE
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCOM.
• FCTM
mftd4gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 16B
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
D. REFERENCES :
• PDP
Normal operations
Cockpit Preparation + Before Start / After Start + Taxi / Before Takeoff + Takeoff + Climb +
Cruise + Descent + ILS Approach + Go Around + Landing + Parking / Securing the Aircraft
Abnormal operations
Fuel Jettison
• FCOM
Standard flight profile - SOP's
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Standard Operating Procedures
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Task Sharing
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Normal Checklists
Use of RMP
- Aircraft Systems / 23 - Communication / How to use the RMP / How to tune a frequency
Fuel Transfer
- Aircraft systems / 28 - Fuel / System Description / Transfer System
Fuel Jettison
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / 28 - Fuel Jettison
- Procedures / Not - Sensed Procedures (ABN PROC) / Fuel Jettison
Diversion
- Aircraft Systems / 22 - AFS - Flight Management System / System Description Flight
Planning / Lateral Flight Plan Revisions / Alternate
- Aircraft Systems / 22 - AFS - Flight Management System / Controls and Indicators / MFD -
FMS pages / Alternate page
mftd4gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 16C
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
• FCTM
Normal operations
- Normal Operations / General + Preliminary Cockpit Preparation + Cockpit Preparation +
Before Start + Start + After Start + Taxi + Before Takeoff + Takeoff + Climb + Cruise +
Descent Preparation + Descent + Approach + ILS Approach + Go Around + Landing +
Parking + Standard Callouts
Abnormal operations
- ABNORMAL OPERATIONS / Miscellaneous / Overweight Landing
mftd4gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 16D
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.03
2 : The crew has already inserted the ZFW / ZFWCG / FOB figures (refer to syllabus) in
the FMS / FUEL&LOAD page
Explain that the FQMS computes the fuel distribution to ensure a CG target for take-
off of approximately 39,5% (SD page).
Observe the TRIM TANK fuel quantity and note the value.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
The FQMS normally receives (via the avionics system) approx every 10 min an
updated ZFWCG sent by the airline operations via DATALINK (the ground engineer
may also update it using the OMT (laptop located at the rear of the cockpit)), in order
to ensure proper fuel distribution (especially quantity in the trim tank) and final
GWCG target of 39,5%
The crew inserts the new figures in the FMS / ACTIVE / FUEL&LOAD page.
Observe that the current fuel distribution does not change. Therefore the FQMS
computes a new GWCG according to the updated ZFW / ZFWCG inserted by the
crew in the FMS.
The crew checks that the updated GWCG is within operational limits:
• If YES:
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
• If NO:
To demonstrate GWCG out of operational limits, the instructor inserts on the IOS
the new initial figures (make sure that the crew does not change the figures on
the FMS FUEL & LOAD page to allow the fuel to be redistributed):
ZFW= 340 T
ZFWCG= 32%
FOB= 83 T
Give the crew an updated LOADSHEET: The loading set up has changed:
New figures to be inserted by the crew in the FMS:
ZFW= 340 T
ZFWCG= 38%
mftd4gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 16E
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
3
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
approx 17 min for the fuel to be transferred forward in the feed tanks, in this case.
The transfer rate is approx 600kg per min.
The crew should crosscheck on the OIS the FQMS computation obtained at the end
of the AUTO GND XFR. Crosscheck the TOCG (OIS) versus the GWCG (SD):
If the difference is within 1%, the CM1 signs the LOADSHEET.
If the difference is above 1%, investigate the causes.
6 : Explain the main transfers, the load alleviation transfers and the CG control transfer
during climb and cruise. Use PDP CRUISE.
8 : In cruise to KEF, demonstrate predictive GPS function, and how to deselect GPS
satellite and GPS.
To return to departure, select LFZZ as ALTN in ALTERNATE menu of FPLN INFO.
Then use the enable ALTN function to activate it.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
9 : Explain the philosophy for jettison.
- If it is urgent to land, the crew consider the overweight landing procedure.
This procedure includes the consideration of jettison.
- If it is not urgent to land, the crew does not usually consider the overweight landing
procedure and wants first to Jettison. In this case, they use the jettison procedure.
Perform the jettison procedure after the activation of the not sensed jettison proce-
dure.
Explain that fuel can be jettisoned except fuel from the feed tanks.
Rate is approximately 150 t per hour (2.5 t per minute).
Explain the JTSN GW field in the active / FUEL & LOAD page
Explain the AUTO RCL function.
17 : Urgent landing due to medical problem with a passenger. LFZZ CLOSED diversion
to LFLL.
mftd4gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 16F
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
3
mftd4gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 17
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
MFTD 5 (FAILURES) - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 020/10 5000 OVC 005 05/03 1012
QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd5.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 18
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
TRIP WIND
INIT TAKE OFF - LFZZ 33 R - GW 385 t
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD Co-route PAT 33R
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd5.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 18A
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
Study of :
• ECAM MANAGEMENT
• ENGINE FAILURE and RELIGHT PROCEDURE
• FUEL LEAK
• DUAL HYDRAULIC FAILURE
• FLAPS FAILURE
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
B. NEW EXERCICES :
• ECAM MANAGEMENT
• ENGINE FAILURE and RELIGHT
• DUAL HYDRAULIC FAILURE
• FUEL LEAK
• FLAPS FAILURE
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCOM.
• FCTM
mftd5gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 18B
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
D. REFERENCES
• PDP
Normal Operations
Takeoff + Climb + Cruise + Descent + ILS Approach + Go Around
Abnormal Operations
- ECAM Management
- Engine failure after V1
- Engine failure in cruise
- Fuel leak
- Slats / Flaps failure cases
• FCOM
Standard flight profile - SOP's
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Standard Operating Procedures
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Task Sharing
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Normal Checklists
ECAM Procedures
- Aircraft Systems / 31 - Indicating/Recording / ECAM / How to Handle ECAM Procedures
Eng fail
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / 70 - Engines / ENG FAIL
- Procedures / Not - Sensed Procedures (ABN PROC) / ENG RELIGHT IN FLT
Performance
- Performance / In-flight /One Engine Inoperative
Fuel leak
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / 28 - Fuel / FUEL LEAK DETECTED
- Procedures / Not - Sensed Procedures (ABN PROC) / FUEL LEAK
• FCTM
Normal operations
Normal Operations / Takeoff + Climb + Cruise + Descent Preparation + Descent + Approach +
ILS Approach + Go Around + Standard Callouts
Abnormal operations
- Operational philosophy / ECAM
- ABNORMAL OPERATIONS / Operating techniques / Engine Failure After V1 + Engin
Failure During Initial Climb + Engine Failure during cruise
- ABNORMAL OPERATIONS / Hydraulic / G + Y Hydraulic Failures
- ABNORMAL OPERATIONS / Flight Controls / Abnormal Flaps and/or Slats Configuration
mftd5gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 18C
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.03
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Insert N1 vibration on ENG 1
ECAM advisory
Insert BRAKES ALTN BRK FAULT (level 1)
Insert ELEC BAT 1 FAULT (level 2-Master Caution + SC)
Insert HYD G RSVR LEVEL LO (level 2-Master Caution + SC)
Insert ENGINE 1 FIRE (level 3-Master Warning + CRC)
Insert LEFT MAIN AVIONICS SMOKE (level 3 - Master Warning + CRC)
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
- STATUS
Restore
Activate the not sensed L/G LDG with Abnormal WING & BODY L/Gs : Explain that
there are a few procedures whose management is different.
Those PROC are displayed until landing, disregarding normal C/L (e.g. LANDING
WITH 2 ENGs INOP ABN PROC)
ECAM system management : Insert ENG 1 FIRE and perform ECAM actions.
Follow the tutorial to explain the management of the ECAM alert
Restore
7 : When relight is successful, explain the deactivation of the not sensed ENGINE
RELIGHT PROC. Reinforce the philosophy : when the condition which has initiated
the activation of a not sensed PROC has disappeared, deactivate the procedure.
8 : Insert ENG 4 A/THR failure. Demonstrate that A/THR is available and drives engine
1, 2 and 3 while engine 4 thrust has to be manually controlled via THR LVR 4.
Restore.
mftd5gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 18D
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
11 : Insert a fuel leak of 1000 kg/min on FEED TANK 1 to trigger "FUEL LEAK
DETECTED" (consider leak from engine) which takes around 3 minutes. On IOS do
not clear malfunction but select a leak of 0 kg/min.
After analyse and engine shutdown, consider leak stopped.
Consequently engine is kept shutdown.
16 : Insert simultaneously HYD GREEN RSVR LEVEL LO and YELLOW RSVR LEVEL
LO
20 : Insert FLAPS LOCKED between Flaps 3 and 1 position - Highlight the max speed
displayed on ECAM. Explain that the VFE on PFD is the VFE of the actual conf and
not linked with the flaps lever position
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
mftd5gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 19
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
MFTD 6 (FAILURES) - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 280/10 2000 OVC 010 -20/-21 1000
QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
V1 v TOGA V1 v TOGA
VR FLEX °C VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd6.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 20
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
VR FLEX °C VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd6.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 20A
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
Study of :
• ENGINE START FAULT
• MANUAL ENGINE START
• CABIN PRESSURIZATION PROBLEM
• CDS FAILURE / RECONFIGURATION
• AUTO FLIGHT SYSTEM FAILURE
• EMERGENCY DESCENT
• AVIONICS SMOKE
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
• ENGINE FAILURE AND RELIGHT
B. NEW EXERCICES :
• MANUAL ENGINE START
• CDS FAILURE / RECONFIGURATION
• AUTO FLIGHT SYSTEM FAILURE
• EXCESS CAB ALT / CABIN PRESSURIZATION LEAK
• EMERGENCY DESCENT
• AVIONICS SMOKE
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCOM.
• FCTM
mftd6gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 20B
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
D. REFERENCES
• PDP
Normal Operations
Cockpit Preparation + Before Start / After Start + Taxi / Before Takeoff + Takeoff + Climb +
Cruise + Descent + ILS Approach + Non Precision Approach +Go Around
Abnormal Operations
- Engine failure after V1
- CDS Reconfiguration
- Emergency Descent
- SMOKE Procedure
• FCOM
Standard flight profile - SOP's
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Standard Operating Procedures
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Task Sharing
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Normal Checklists
ECAM Procedures
- Aircraft Systems / 31 - Indicating/Recording / ECAM / How to Handle ECAM Procedures
Eng fail
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / 70 - Engines / ENG FAIL
- Procedures / Not - Sensed Procedures (ABN PROC) / ENG RELIGHT IN FLT
FCU Back up
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / 22- Auto flight / AUTO FLT AFS
CTL PNL FAULT
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / 31- Indicating/Recording / CDS CPT
(EFIS) CTL PNL FAULT
Emergency descent
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / 21 - Pressurisation / CAB PRESS
EXCESS CAB ALT
- Procedures / Not - Sensed Procedures (ABN PROC) / Emergency procedures
CDS Failure
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / 31 - Indicating/Recording / CDS
Smoke
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / 26 - Fire and smoke protection /
SMOKE MAIN AVNCS SMOKE
mftd6gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 20C
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
• FCTM
Normal operations
Normal operations / Cockpit Preparation + Before Start / After Start + Taxi / Before Takeoff +
Takeoff + Climb + Cruise + Decent Preparation + Descent + Approach + ILS Approach + Non
Precision Approach + Go Around + Standard callouts
Abnormal operations
- Operational philosophy / ECAM
- ABNORMAL OPERATIONS / Operating techniques / Engine Failure After V1 + Engine
Failure During Initial Climb
- ABNORMAL OPERATIONS / Fire Protection / SMOKE/FUMES
- ABNORMAL OPERATIONS / Miscellaneous / EMERGENCY DESCENT
- ABNORMAL OPERATIONS / Auto flight / AUTO FLT AFS/EFIS CTL PNL FAULT
- ABNORMAL OPERATIONS / Miscellaneous / Bomb on Board
• QRH
- SMOKE procedures
mftd6gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 20D
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.03
2 : FMS preparation with KBD OFF on KCCU 2 in order to practice FMS preparation
with CCD and SOFT KEYBOARD.
When FMS preparation completed, restore
3 : Insert a HOT START on engine 4. When ECAM actions completed, restore, perform
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
a manual engine start on engine 4. Then perform a manual start on Engine 1 with
hot start to highlight the difference of protections between AUTO and MAN. Restore
and perform a quick start through IOS panel.
9,12,20: FLS approach in cold weather conditions. Explain that the FLS profile takes into
account the temperature corrections (use tutorial NPA flown with FLS function,
COLD WEATHER).
11 : For training purpose, on MFD FCU BACKUP page, select manually AFS and EFIS
BACKUP.
13,23: When Q and A with Tutorial completed, trainees perform an emergency descent
without failure. Trainees should select the ABN Not-Sensed PROC : EMER
DESCENT to update the ECAM limitations.
22 : Perform the DEMO by switching OFF the DU’s instead of inserting failure. Proceed
step by step, to demonstrate the auto reconf, and then the manual one, via the
RECONF P/B. After the demo, insert a CAPT PFD CDS unit fault. When ECAM
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
24 : Insert CABIN PRESS DOOR LEAK 1L with a leak rate of 1500 ft/min
27 : Brief the "BOMB ON BOARD" procedure using the FCOM. Then for demo activate
the not sensed "BOMB ON BOARD" procedure for display only.
Do not perform actions.
mftd6gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 21
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
MFTD 7 (Progress Check) - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 030/12 3000 OVC 006 30/20 1011
LFPO 060/10 4000 OVC 800 28/26 1012 QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
E.
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R / GW 390 t LFZZ 33R / GW 390 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd7.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 22
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd7.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 22A
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Check trainee’s ability to carry out normal and abnormal operations according to standard
requirements.
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
• ECAM PHILOSOPHY AND ECAM MANAGEMENT
B. NEW EXERCICES :
• NIL
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCOM.
• FCTM
mftd7gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.03 Page 22B
A380 L F2S
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.03
If flight crew decision is to perform a fuel auto ground transfer, give a new slot for
departure. Therefore, due to time constraint, flight crew will compute a new load-
sheet on the OIS with updated figures, instead of performing a fuel transfer.
11 : At BRY, Insert PACK 1 OVHT and PACK 2 FAULT. When PACKS OFF, insert PACK
1 FAULT. Explain that with PACKS OFF, the cabin depressurization rate is less than
1000 ft / min.
Descent and diversion to LFPO, fail G/S of ILS RWY 06.
Clearance is MLN FL 60 then radar vectors for LOC APP RWY 06 (G/S INOP)
18 : During engine shutdown, ground mechanics indicates a tail pipe fire on engine 2.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
27 : Insert engine 4 OIL QTY at 0 to trigger ENG 4 OIL PRESS LO, which leads the crew
to shutdown the engine.
30 : Due to ILS 06 FAILURE, radar vectors for VOR DME RWY 06.
For training purpose, approach in selected mode.
mftd7gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 1
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 1 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 330/10 9999 SCT 025 20/10 1010 EVENTS
Time
ATHR
HUD
LFLL CALM 5000 OVC 008 20/10 1010
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT GATE A 1 - LFZZ 33R
FLT NBR A/L ID 201 GW 385 t
FROM LFZZ TO LFLL ALTN LFZZ Co-route AIBLYS
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs1.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 2
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 1 - TRAINEE 2
E
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 330/10 9999 SCT 025 20/10 1010 EVENTS
Time
ATHR
HUD
LFLL CALM 5000 OVC 008 20/10 1010
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
2:25 INIT HOLDING POINT- LFZZ 33R
FLT NBR A/L ID 201 GW 385 t
FROM LFZZ TO LFLL ALTN LFZZ Co-route AIBLYS
TRIP WIND HD 15
2:55 INIT HOLDING POINT- LFZZ 33R
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD GW 385 t
Co-route PAT 33 R
385 t 65 t
GW FOB
847 000 lb 143 000 lb 30 - TAKE OFF v v
31 - CLIMB 4000 FT v v
320 t ZFWC 32 - PATTERN 33R v v
ZFW 35 % 33 - VISUAL APP v v
704 000 lb G
34 - LANDING
NOTES
DAY VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE 3:10 INIT HOLDING POINT- LFZZ 33R
RWY COND DRY (SID ONZON 1N) GW 385 t
AIR COND ON PAX NUMBER : 100 Co-route PAT 33 R
ANTI ICE OFF
35 - TAKE OFF v v
36 - CLIMB 2300 FT v v
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272 37 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF 38 - GO AROUND v v
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t 39 - CLIMB 2300 FT v v
40 - VISUAL PATTERN v
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA 41 - LANDING
42 - AFTER LANDING
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX 43 - TAXI
44 - PARKING - GATE A1
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED 3:45 45 - SECURING THE AIRCRAFT
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs1.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 2A
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Practice cockpit preparation (real environment).
• Introduction to aircraft handling characteristics.
• Introduction to "Normal Law" - Envelope protections.
• Practice visual pattern, go around and landing.
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• Cockpit preparation using aircraft equipments in a real environment.
B. NEW EXERCISES :
• TAKE OFF
• NORMAL LAW - PROTECTIONS
• SIDE STICK PRIORITY
• VISUAL PATTERN
• TCAS EVENT
• GO AROUND
• LANDING
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides
• FCOM
• FCTM
D. REFERENCES
• BRIEFING GUIDES
Taxi + Takeoff + Landing + Normal Law + Visual Pattern + Velocity Vector + TCAS
Normal Law
- Aircraft systems / 27 - Flight Controls / Flight Control System / Normal Law
Protections
- Aircraft systems / 22 - 27 - Flight Envelope / Operating Speeds + Protections
ffs1gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 2B
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
TCAS Event
- Procedures / Non ECAM Procedures / 34 - Navigation / SURV Traffic Advisory Alert +
Resolution Advisory Alerts
• FCTM
Velocity Vector
- Supplementary Information / Flight References
ffs1gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 2C
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
- Seat adjustment, lights
- Laptop installation
- Oxygen masks
- Audio : hand mike, headset, RMP, ACP, PTT
- Use of taxi camera, airport navigation
- First FFS handling characteristics review (NWS, taxi, brake check, flight control
check, take off side stick position, rotation technique)
7 : VV design
- Explain that whatever the size and the color, VV indicates always the same thing /
the track (TRK) and the flight path angle (FPA).
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
- The message to be adressed about size and color is :
• Size means FD status
• small : FD ON follow FD
• big : FD OFF follow VV
• Color means
• black = HDG / VS
• green = TRK / FPA
ffs1gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 2D
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
7(end): Protections
Trainee 1 performs all the protections exercices in clean configuration.
Trainee 2 performs only the high angle of attack protection in landing
configuration. AP OFF - FD OFF - TRK / FPA - A/THR OFF
• Emphasize that the max bank angle corresponds to the max G load (2.5 G),
displayed on SD
9,27 : When reaching DME ARC, trainee disconnects AP, to fly manually following FD
orders.
10,28 : Stabilized approach to allow the trainee to feel the aircraft configuration changes
while manually flying.
ffs1gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 2E
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
14,32 : Freeze position in downwind. Trainees set FD OFF. Insert 25 kt crosswind left then
right to notice the impact on the VV position. Then remove crosswind and unfreeze.
26 : TCAS event : select scenario 9 (reversed V/S) when levelled off at FL 120.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
ffs1gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 2F
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
ffs1gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 3
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 2 - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 050/20 8000 OVC 008 8/4 998 EVENTS
Time
ATHR
HUD
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT GATE A1 - LFZZ 33
FLT NBR A/L ID 202 GW 385 t
Co-route AIBAIB1
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL
CPNY RTE AIBAIB1 1 - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
(AIRCRAFT NOT ELECTRICALLY v
ALTN RTE AIBLYS SUPPLIED)
2 - COCKPIT PREPARATION v
CRZ FL FL 70 CRZ TEMP 0°C v
3 - ENG START / AFTER START
CI 90 TROPO 36090 4 - TAXI v
1:00 5 - TAKE OFF - CROSSWIND -
TRIP WIND HD 15 v v v
INCAPACITATION
6 - SID - CLIMB FL 120 - TCAS EVENT v v v v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD
7 - DES - STAR v v v v
385 t 65 t 8 - LOC APP - LFZZ 33R (FLS) v v v v v
GW FOB
847 000 lb 143 000 lb 9 - REJECTED LANDING v v v
10 - VOR DME - LFZZ 33R (FLS) v v v v
320 t 11 - LANDING - CROSSWIND v
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 lb
1:40 INIT HOLDING POINT- LFZZ 33R
NOTES GW 385 t - WIND 050/15
DAY VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE Co-route PAT 33R
RWY COND DRY (SID MOU 1N)
AIR COND ON PAX NUMBER : 250 12 - TAKE OFF - PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR
v v v
WINDSHEAR
ANTI ICE OFF
13 - CLIMB 4000 FT v v v
E 14 - PATTERN 33R v v v
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272 15 - ILS APP RAW DATA - LFZZ 33R v v v
2:00 16 - LANDING v
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t INIT APP - LFZZ 33R
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA GW 385 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs2.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 4
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 2 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 050/20 8000 OVC 008 8/4 998 EVENTS
Time
ATHR
HUD
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
2:20 INIT HOLDING POINT- LFZZ 33R
FLT NBR A/L ID 202 GW 385 t
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL Co-route PAT 33R
FLAPS 3 THS FOR FLAPS 3 THS FOR 3:45 38 - ILS APP RAW DATA - LFZZ 33R v v v
39 - LANDING LFZZ 33R v
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF 40 - AFTER LANDING v
41 - TAXI - GATE A1 v
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA 42 - PARKING v
3:55 43 - SECURING THE AIRCRAFT v
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs2.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 4A
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
Practice :
• Cockpit preparation (real environment).
• Non precision approaches and ILS RAW DATA.
• Windshear recovery techniques at Takeoff.
• Takeoff and Landing with crosswind.
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• Cockpit preparation using aircraft equipments in a real environment.
• Visual pattern.
• ILS approach.
• Go around procedure.
B. NEW EXERCISES :
• TAKE OFF WITH CROSSWIND
• PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR - WINDSHEAR (TAKE OFF)
• ILS RAW DATA
• NON PRECISION APPROACH
• CREW INCAPACITATION
• LANDING WITH CROSSWIND
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides
• FCOM
• FCTM
ffs2gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 4B
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
D. REFERENCES :
• BRIEFING GUIDES
Taxi + Takeoff + Crosswind takeoff + Incapacitation + Windshear + ILS RAW DATA + Visual
Pattern + Velocity Vector + TCAS
• FCOM
Crew Incapacitation
- Procedures / Non ECAM Procedures / Miscellaneous
TCAS Event
- Procedures / Non ECAM Procedures / 34 - Navigation / SURV Traffic Advisory Alert +
Resolution Advisory Alerts
Windshear
- Procedures / Supplementary Procedures / Adverse Weather / Operations in windshear -
Downburst conditions
- Procedures / Non ECAM Procedures / 34 - Navigation / SURV MONITOR RADAR DIS-
PLAY + WINDSHEAR AHEAD WINDSHEAR AHEAD + GO AROUND WINDSHEAR
AHEAD + WINDSHEAR, WINDSHEAR, WINDSHEAR
• FCTM
Velocity Vector
- Supplementary Information / Flight References
Crew Incapacitation
- Abnormal Operations / Miscellaneous
ffs2gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 4C
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
ffs2gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 4D
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
DAY VISUAL
TRAINEE 2
4 : Demonstrate FMS Take Off shift function. Line up via B2 with a shift of 170 meters.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
5 : Trainee 2 incapacitation :
At 100 ft the trainee 2 set an unusual high pitch attitude and holds the stick control.
Emphasize the latching condition on Trainee 1 side (more than 30 sec.).
Back to normal crew position when incapacitation procedure completed and aircraft
in clean configuration.
18 : In CONF1 and when Go Around altitude set, initiate a Go Around and perform
standard missed approach procedure.
The idea is to insure that trainees are able to cope with a well above MDA GO
AROUND, with rapid FMA changes.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
TRAINEE 1
24 : When on final, conf 2 or 3, initiate a go around before 1000 ft AGL and provide radar
vectoring with a climb to 3700 ft QNH.
After aircraft is clean, resume climb to MSA.
The idea is to insure that trainees are able to cope with a well above MDA GO
AROUND, with rapid FMA changes.
37 : Trainee 1 incapacitation :
During go around, trainee 1 faints, then trainee 2 takes control.
End of exercice when incapacitation procedure completed and aircraft in clean
configuration.
ffs2gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 5
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 3 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
EVENTS
Time
LFZZ 280/12 5000 OVC 900 33/15 1020
ATHR
HUD
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT INIT GATE A1 - LFZZ 24
FLT NBR A/L ID 203 MTOW 569 t
Co route AIBKEF - NIGHT VISUAL
FROM LFZZ TO BIKF ALTN EINN
CPNY RTE AIBKEF 1 - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
APU BLEED FAULT (AIRCRAFT NOT
ALTN RTE KEFSNN ELECTRICALLY SUPPLIED)
2 - COCKPIT PREPARATION
CRZ FL FL 360 CRZ TEMP -55°C 3 - ENG START WITH EXT PNEUMATIC
POWER
CI 90 TROPO 36090
4 - TAXI
TRIP WIND TL 15 0:50 5 - TAKE OFF - PACKS OFF - ARS DEMO v v
6 - SID - CLIMB FL 120 - TCAS EVENT v v v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD 7 - CRUISE - DIVERSION TO LFZZ v v v
569 t 209 t 1:10 8 - DES - STAR v v v
GW FOB 9 - LOC APP OVERWEIGHT - LFZZ 33R
1 232 000 lb 440 000 lb v v v v
(FLS) - AES DEMO
10 - PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR /
360 t v v
ZFW ZFWCG 35 % WINDSHEAR ON APP
792 000 lb 1:30 11 - GO AROUND v v
NOTES 12 - ILS APP - LFZZ 33R v v v v
NIGHT VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE 13 - OVERWEIGHT LANDING
RWY COND DRY (SID MOU 1W)
1:50 INIT HOLDING POINT - LFZZ 24
AIR COND OFF PAX NUMBER : 500 GW 385t - ZFW 320 t - FOB 65 t
ANTI ICE OFF 310/25 - 25 km - SCT 030 - NIGHT VISUAL
E
14 - TAKE OFF - CROSSWIND - DEMO
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272 v v
FLRS
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF 15 - CLIMB 2300 FT v v
LFZZ 24 / MTOW 569 t LFZZ 24 / MTOW 569 t 16 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
17 - LOW ENERGY WARNING v
V1 v TOGA V1 v TOGA
18 - LANDING CROSSWIND
19 - 180° ON RUNWAY 60 m WIDTH
VR FLEX VR FLEX
2:00 INIT APP - LFZZ 33 R
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED GW 385 t
NIGHT VISUAL
FLAPS OPT THS FOR FLAPS OPT THS FOR
20 - ILS APP LFZZ 33R -
v v v
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF G/S FROM ABOVE
LFZZ 24 / GW 385 t LFZZ 24 / GW 385 t 21 - GPWS BASIC MODE DEMO
v v v
RECOVERY PROC
V1 129 TOGA V1 138 TOGA 22 - GO AROUND - AFTER T/OFF C/L v v
ffs3.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 6
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 3 - TRAINEE 2
E
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 280/12 5000 OVC 900 33/15 1020 EVENTS
Time
ATHR
HUD
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
2:25 INIT HOLDING POINT- LFZZ 24
FLT NBR A/L ID 203 MTOW 569 t
Co-route AIBKEF - NIGHT VISUAL
FROM LFZZ TO BIKF ALTN EINN
CPNY RTE AIBKEF 23 - TAKE OFF - PACKS OFF v v
24 - SID - CLIMB FL 120 -
ALTN RTE KEFSNN v v v
REVERSION MODE
25 - RETURN TO DEPARTURE v v v
CRZ FL FL 360 CRZ TEMP -55°C
26 - LOC (BACK CRS) DME - LFZZ 15L v v v v
CI 90 TROPO 36090 27 - WINDSHEAR ON APP v v
2:55 28 - GO AROUND v v
TRIP WIND TL 15 29 - ILS APP - LFZZ 33R v v v v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD 30 - OVERWEIGHT LANDING
ffs3.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 6A
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
Practice
• Decision making (CRM).
• Unusual engine start / engine start with EXT PNEU PWR
• Heavy weight operations.
• Non precision Approaches.
• Windshear recovery technique in approach.
• 180° TURN on RWY 60m width
• GPWS recovery technique
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• Non precision approach.
• Go around procedure.
• Take off and landing with crosswind.
• TCAS
B. NEW EXERCISES :
• UNUSUAL ENGINE START / ENGINE START WITH EXT PNEU PWR
• PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR - WINDSHEAR (LANDING)
• AUTO RETRACTION / EXTENSION SYSTEM
• REVERSION MODE (FD orders not followed)
• LOW ENERGY WARNING
• FLAPS LOAD RELIEF
• 180° TURN ON RWY 60M WIDTH
• G/S FROM ABOVE
• GPWS
• EMER EVACUATION
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides
• FCOM
• FCTM
ffs3gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 6B
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
D. REFERENCES :
• BRIEFING GUIDES
Taxi + Takeoff + Crosswind takeoff + Slats - Flaps protections + Windshear + Visual
Pattern + Velocity Vector + Low energy warning + Glide slope from above + Taws + Mode
Reversions + TCAS + Emergency evacuation
• FCOM
Standard flight profile - SOP's
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Standard Operating Procedures
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Task Sharing
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Normal Checklists
Windshear
- Procedures / Supplementary Procedures / Adverse Weather / Operations in windshear -
Downburst conditions
- Procedures / Non ECAM Procedures / 34 - Navigation / SURV MONITOR RADAR DIS-
PLAY + WINDSHEAR AHEAD WINDSHEAR AHEAD + GO AROUND WINDSHEAR
AHEAD + WINDSHEAR, WINDSHEAR, WINDSHEAR
Taws
- Procedures / Non ECAM Procedures / 34 - Navigation / SURV
TCAS Event
- Procedures / Non ECAM Procedures / 34 - Navigation / SURV Traffic Advisory Alert +
Resolution Advisory Alerts
Overweight landing
- Procedures / Not - Sensed Procedures / Miscellaneous
APU Fire
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / 26 - Fire and Smoke Protection /
APU FIRE
ffs3gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 6C
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
• FCTM
Velocity Vector
- Supplementary Information / Flight References
Use of MMEL
- Normal Operations / Flight Preparation / MEL
Overweight Landing
- Abnormal operations / Miscellaneous
Emergency Evacuation
- Abnormal operations / Operating Techniques
• QRH
- EVACUATION
ffs3gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 6D
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04
NIGHT VISUAL
TRAINEE 1
1 : Insert APU Bleed fault, before APU Bleed ON selected by flight crew. Dispatch with
MMEL
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
5 : When in CONF 1 + F, observe flap autoretraction at 212 kt, and change on PFD :
1 + F to 1
9 : Fail IANR G/S. In approach, select CONF 1; reduce speed below 205 kt to activate
the automatic extension system (AES). Observe that flaps will extend to 1 + F.
VFE + 2,5 kt, observe FLAP LOAD RELIEF and RELIEF displayed on lower PFD.
Continue to accelerate in order to exceed VFE ; observe no further retraction and
overspeed warning. Increase pitch to 15° and point out FLAP reextension at
VFE - 2,5 kt. Fly FD to retract Slats / Flaps
17 : A/THR Off : Start final turn in level flight to trigger the "SPEED, SPEED, SPEED"
warning.
21 : When the trainee has completed the G/S from above procedure and rearmed the
G/S, the instructor requests to disarm the G/S to demonstrate the GPWS warnings.
The purpose is to perform the recovery procedure when "PULL UP" is triggered.
TRAINEE 2
ffs3gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 7
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 4 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 350/10 6000 OVC 010 30/10 1020 EVENTS
Time
ATHR
HUD
LFLL 350/10 6000 OVC 012 30/10 1020
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT HOLDING POINT - LFZZ 33R
FLT NBR A/L ID 204 GW 385t
FROM LFZZ TO LFLL ALTN LFZZ Co-route AIBLYS
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs4.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 8
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 4 - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 350/10 6000 OVC 010 30/10 1020 EVENTS
Time
ATHR
HUD
LFLL 350/10 6000 OVC 012 30/10 1020
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
2:20 INIT HOLDING POINT - LFLL 36 L
FLT NBR A/L ID 204 GW 385 t
FROM LFLL TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL Co-route LYSAIB
IF TRAINEE 2 CAPTAIN
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF INIT APP - LFZZ 06
LFLL 36L GW 385 t LFLL 36L / GW 385 t GW 385 t
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs4.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 8A
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Demonstration of FCTL alternate and direct laws.
• Demonstration of backup module
Practice :
• Stall recovery
• Dual hydraulic failure event.
• Emergency electrical configuration event.
• Approach and landing in alternate and direct law.
• EGPWS recovery technique.
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• WINDSHEAR RECOVERY TECHNIQUE
• FUEL LEAK
B. NEW EXERCISES :
• F/CTL RECONFIGURATION LAWS
• STALL RECOVERY
• HYD G + Y RSVR LVL LO
• EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL CONFIGURATION
• EGPWS
• FLAPS LOCKED (BEFORE EXTENSION)
• ILS APP in ALTERNATE / DIRECT LAW
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides
• FCOM
• FCTM
ffs4gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 8B
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
D. REFERENCES :
• BRIEFING GUIDES
Taxi + Takeoff + Windshear + Reconfiguration Law + Stall Recovery + Slats - Flaps
protections + Velocity Vector + Taws
• FCOM
Standard flight profile - SOP's
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Standard Operating Procedures
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Task Sharing
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Normal Checklists
Windshear
- Procedures / Supplementary Procedures / Adverse Weather / Operations in windshear -
Downburst conditions
- Procedures / Non ECAM Procedures / 34 - Navigation / SURV MONITOR RADAR DIS-
PLAY + WINDSHEAR AHEAD WINDSHEAR AHEAD + GO AROUND WINDSHEAR
AHEAD + WINDSHEAR, WINDSHEAR, WINDSHEAR
Fuel leak
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency procedures / 28 - Fuel / Fuel leak
Taws
- Procedures / Non ECAM Procedures / 34 - Navigation / SURV
ffs4gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 8C
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
• FCTM
Velocity Vector
- Supplementary Information / Flight References
Abnormal operations
- Operational philosophy / Flight Control / Laws / Alternate Law + Direct Law + Indications
ffs4gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 8D
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04
DAY VISUAL
TRAINEE 1
INIT HOLDING POINT: Cockpit preparation performed by instructor.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
3 : - Use FCTL ALTN / DIRECT / BACK UP module / demo menu to perform theses
exercises.
- No failure inserted during these demo.
- Do not explain in details the different laws.
- Reinforce the following points:
ALTN LAW progressive degradation impacting handling and protection
IMPORTANT: Whatever the ALT LAW active, the ECAM always displays FCTL
protection lost, even if some protections remain available.
DIRECT LAW: Use of manual pitch trim
BACKUP Module: Aircraft controlable on the 3 axis through sidestick and rudder
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
5 : Insert simultaneously HYD G + Y RSVR LEVEL LO
TRAINEE 2
20 : Insert a fuel leak of 1000 kg/min on FEED TANK 1 to trigger "Fuel leak detected"
(which takes around 3 minutes).
After analize and engine shutdown, consider leak continues consequently engine is
relighted.
28 : Set CAVOK
"After ROA heading 250°, maintain 3000 ft".
Explain to your trainees that for training purpose they don’t change the aircraft
trajectory in spite of terrain ahead caution and warning in order to trigger the "PULL
UP" and to perform the recovery procedure at "PULL UP".
32 : If TRAINEE 2 CAPTAIN :
Trainee 2 changes from right to left seat : Instructor configurates the aircraft in elec-
trical emergency configuration with gear and flaps extended before releasing the
simulation.
ffs4gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 9
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 5 - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ CALM 6000 OVC 008 15/10 1000 EVENTS
Time
ATHR
HUD
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT HOLDING POINT APU RUNNING -
FLT NBR A/L ID 205 LFZZ 33 R - GW 385 t - DAY VISUAL
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL Co-Route PAT 33R
ffs5.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 10
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 5 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ CALM 6000 OVC 008 15/10 1000 EVENTS
Time
ATHR
HUD
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
2:20 INIT HOLDING POINT - LFZZ 33R -
FLT NBR A/L ID 205 GW 385 t - DAY VISUAL
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL Co-Route PAT 33R
CRZ FL FL 70 CRZ TEMP 0°C 2:40 INIT HOLDING POINT - LFZZ 33R
GW 385 t - DAY VISUAL
CI 90 TROPO 36090 Co-Route PAT 33R
ffs5.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 10A
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
Practice :
• TAKE OFF and LANDING with engine failure.
• TAKE OFF with engine failure at MTOW.
• LANDING with engine failure in overweight.
• REJECTED TAKE OFF.
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• OVERWEIGHT LANDING
B. NEW EXERCISES :
• ENGINE FAILURE
• ENGINE RELIGHT
• REJECTED TAKE OFF
• EMER EVACUATION
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides
• FCOM
• FCTM
D. REFERENCES :
• BRIEFING GUIDES
Taxi + Takeoff + One Engine Out + Rejected Takeoff + Emergency evacuation
• FCOM
Engine Stall
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / 70 - Engines / ENG STALL
Engine Relight
- Procedures / Not - Sensed Procedures (ABN PROC) / ENG
ffs5gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 10B
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
Engine Fire
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / 26 - Fire and Smoke Protection /
ENG FIRE
Overweight landing
- Procedures / Not - Sensed Procedures / Miscellaneous
Rejected Takeoff
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / Operating Techniques
Emergency Evacuation
- Procedures / Not - Sensed Procedures (ABN PROC) / Emergency Procedures
• FCTM
Overweight Landing
- Abnormal operations / Miscellaneous
• QRH
- EVACUATION
ffs5gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 10C
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04
6 : TRAINEE 2 / TRAINEE 1
Freeze POS and ALT at 500 ft after take off.
SRS commands satisfied, wings level, side stick released, feet off rudder pedals.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Select F/CTL page. Select IDLE thrust on one engine.
Adjust pitch attitude to that required by SRS (the current speed or V2, whichever is
greater up to V2 + 15 kt).
Hands off: observe response of FBW system. Stabilized bank angle 7~9°, spoilers
and ailerons deployed, rudder pedals feedback, flying the pitch as adjusted before.
Side slip index is blue now and displays the BETA TARGET.
Fly the aircraft. Use continuous rudder input to center the BETA TARGET.
Trim out the foot load and observe the flight controls status on F/CTL page.
Repeat up to proficiency.
Transfer the controls to Trainee 1 and repeat exercises.
9 : Insert simultaneously engine 4 fire 2nd agent discharge and engine 4 fail damage.
17,33 : Inform the crew that a passenger requires an immediate medical assistance. Crew
perfoms overweight landing procedure and initiates the jettison.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
For training purpose, the instructor reduces the landing weight to 420t.
23,24 : Insert engine 4 fail no damage. Insert an engine start fault EGT overlimit on engine 4.
In order to interrupt the relight procedure and highlight the FADEC limited protection
in flight.
25 : Insert simultaneously engine 1 fire 1st agent discharge and engine 1 fail damage no
N1.
ffs5gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 10D
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
ffs5gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 11
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 6 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 270/10 9999 OVC 015 20/10 998 EVENTS
Time
ATHR
HUD
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT HOLDING POINT- LFZZ 33R
FLT NBR A/L ID 206 GW 385 t
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL Co route AIBAIB
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs6.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 12
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 6 - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 270/10 9999 OVC 015 20/10 998 EVENTS
Time
ATHR
HUD
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
2:20 INIT HOLDING POINT- LFZZ 33R
FLT NBR A/L ID 206 GW 385 t
Co-route AIBAIB
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL
CPNY RTE AIBAIB 19 - TAKE OFF
20 - CLIMB FL 120 - TCAS EVENT v v v
ALTN RTE AIBLYS
21 - LEFT MAIN AVIONICS SMOKE v v v
22 - RETURN TO DEPARTURE - RESTORE v v v
CRZ FL FL 310 CRZ TEMP -10°C
23 - RADAR VECTORS v v v
CI 90 TROPO 36090 24 - BACKUP SPEED SCALE DEMO v
25 - ILS APP - LFZZ 33R - DIRECT LAW v
TRIP WIND -
26 - LANDING
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD
2:55 INIT FL 350
385 t 65 t GW 385 t
GW FOB
847 000 lb 143 000 lb Co-route AIBAIB
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX °C VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs6.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 12A
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04 <
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
Practice :
• One engine out landing.
• Two engines out landing.
• Rejected take off.
• All engines flame out.
• Avionics smoke
• Back Up Speed Scale (BUSS)
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• FCU AFS CTL PNL FAULT
• ENGINE FAILURE
• ENGINE RELIGHT
• TCAS
• REJECTED TAKE OFF
• EMERGENCY DESCENT
• AVIONICS SMOKE
• EMER EVACUATION
B. NEW EXERCISES:
• BACK UP SPEED SCALE (BUSS)
• ALL ENGINES FLAME OUT
• FMS 1 + 2 FAULT
• TWO ENGINES OUT APPROACH & LANDING
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides
• FCOM
• FCTM
ffs6gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 12B
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
D. REFERENCES :
• BRIEFING GUIDES
Taxi + Takeoff + TCAS + All Engines Out + Two Engines Out + Back Up Speed Scale
(BUSS) + FMS 1+2 FAULT + Landing + Rejected Takeoff + Emergency evacuation
• FCOM
Standard flight profile - SOP's
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Standard Operating Procedures
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Task Sharing
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Normal Checklists
FCU Back Up
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / 31 - Indicating/Recording / CDS
CPT + F/O EFIS CTL PNL FAULT
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / 22 - Flight Guidance / AUTO FLT
AFS CTL PNL FAULT
FMS 1 + 2 Fault
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / 22 - Flight Management
Emergency Descent
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / 21 - Pressurisation / CAB PRESS
EXCESS CAB ALT
BUSS
- Aircraft System / 34 - Navigation / ADIRS / System Description / ADR Monitoring +
Backup Speed and Altitude Scale
Rejected Takeoff
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / Operating Techniques
Emergency Evacuation
- Procedures / Not - Sensed Procedures (ABN PROC) / Emergency Procedures
ffs6gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 12C
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
• FCTM
FCU Back Up
- Abnormal operations / Auto Flight
Emergency Descent
- Abnormal operations / Miscellaneous
Smoke / Fumes
- Abnormal operations / Fire Protection
Engine Failure
- Abnormal operations / Operating Techniques / Engine Failure during Cruise + One Engine
Inoperative Go Around + One Engine Inoperative Landing + Two Engine Inoperatvie
Landing
• QRH
- EVACUATION
- SMOKE / FUMES
ffs6gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 12D
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04
DAY VISUAL
TRAINEE 1
9 : Keep engine failed to apply relight procedure in windmilling until FL 200 where the
APU is started.
When APU BLEED on, cancel engine failure on engine 1 and 2 to allow relight on
engine 1 and 2.
When the first engine is relit, ALL ENG FLAME OUT alert disappears.
Continue tentative of relights on engine 3 by selecting the ENG RELIGHT ABN
PROC as requested by ECAM. Cancel engine 3 failure to allow engine 3 relight but
keep engine 4 failed to continue the approach with one engine inoperative.
Restore electrical emergency configuration. Reset all systems and ADIRS quick
alignment to recover normal law, but keep engine 4 shutdown.
ffs6gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 12E
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
TRAINEE 2
21 : Insert LEFT MAIN AVNCS SMOKE. When GEN 1 + 2 OFF, smoke still detected in
the bay. Continue procedure. When Gen 3 + 4 OFF, smoke stops in the AVNCS BAY.
24 : Set 3 ADR OFF for BUSS demo. Explain that the lower part of the green band is the
target to fly before extending S/F configuration. The higher part the target to retract.
When configurated, target to fly is the middle of the green band.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
27 : Insert FWD CARGO DOOR NOT CLOSED + CAB PRESS EXCESS CAB ALT in
order to simulate cargo door loss. .
29 : Passing FL 150, insert engine 3 OIL PRESS LO in order to shutdown the engine
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
ffs6gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 12F
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
ffs6gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 13
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 7 - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 270/15 3000 SN OVC 009 -2/-4 1019 EVENTS
Time
ATHR
HUD
BIKF 320/18 2000 SN OVC 008 -10/-3 1013
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT HOLDING POINT- LFZZ 33R -
FLT NBR A/L ID 207 MTOW
FROM LFZZ TO BIKF ALTN EINN Co-route AIBKEF
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs7.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 14
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 7 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 270/15 3000 SN OVC 009 -2/-4 1019 EVENTS
Time
ATHR
HUD
BIKF 320/18 2000 SN OVC 008 -10/-3 1013
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
2:05 INIT HOLDING POINT - LFZZ 33R -
FLT NBR A/L ID 207 MTOW
Co-route AIBKEF
FROM LFZZ TO BIKF ALTN EINN
CPNY RTE AIBKEF 15 - TAKE OFF v v v
16 - ENGINE FAIL AFTER V1 v v v
ALTN RTE KEFSNN
17 - JETTISON v v v
18 - VOR DME APP ONE ENGINE OUT -
CRZ FL FL 360 CRZ TEMP -55°C v v v
LFZZ 33 R (FLS)
CI 90 TROPO 36090 2:30 19 - GO AROUND ONE ENG OUT v v v
20 - RADAR VECTORS - DOWNWIND v v v
TRIP WIND - 21 - ILS APP - LFZZ 33 R
v v v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD TWO ENGINES OUT
22 - LANDING TWO ENGINES OUT v
GW - FOB -
2:50 INIT TAKE OFF - LFZZ 24
300 t MTOW 569 t - ZFW 360 t - FOB 209 t
ZFW ZFWCG 35 % Co-route AIBAIB1
777 000 lb
RR Trent 972
NOTES V1 : 126 - VR : 150 - V2 : 158 - TOGA
DAY VISUAL (down to night) FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE EA GP 7272
RWY COND COMPACTED SNOW FOR TAKE OFF V1 : 126 - VR : 150 - V2 : 158 -
AND WET FOR LANDING
AIR COND ON (SID ATN 1N) 23 - TAKE OFF - ENGINE FAILURE
v v v
BEFORE V1 - INCAPACITATION
ANTI ICE ENG + WING ON PAX NUMBER: 450
24 - REJECTED TAKE OFF v
ffs7.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 14A
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Practice one engine out take off / go around.
• Practice two engines out landing.
• Familiarize and practice Back Up Speed Scale (BUSS).
• Crew incapacitation.
• Practice AIR COND SMOKE and SMOKE FUMES REMOVAL procedures
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• EMERGENCY DESCENT
• ENGINE FAILURE
• CREW INCAPACITATION
• JETTISON
• BACK UP SPEED SCALE (BUSS)
• TWO ENGINES OUT
• REJECTED TAKE OFF
• EMER EVACUATION
B. NEW EXERCISES :
• AIR COND SMOKE - SMOKE FUMES REMOVAL
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides
• FCOM
• FCTM
ffs7gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 14B
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
D. REFERENCES :
• BRIEFING GUIDES
Taxi + Takeoff + 2 Engines Out + Back Up Speed Scale (BUSS) + Landing + Rejected
Takeoff + Emergency evacuation
• FCOM
Fuel Jettison
- Procedures / Not - Sensed Procedures (ABN PROC) / Fuel
BUSS
- Aircraft System / 34 - Navigation / ADIRS / System Description / ADR Monitoring +
Backup Speed and Altitude Scale
Rejected Takeoff
- Procedures / Abnormal and Emergency Procedures / Operating Techniques
Crew Incapacitation
- Procedures / Non ECAM Procedures / Miscellaneous
Emergency Evacuation
- Procedures / Not - Sensed Procedures (ABN PROC) / Emergency Procedures
• FCTM
Emergency Descent
- Abnormal operations / Miscellaneous
ffs7gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 14C
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
Engine Failure
- Abnormal operations / Operating Techniques / Engine Failure during Cruise + One Engine
Inoperative Go Around + Two Engine Inoperatvie Landing
Crew Incapacitation
- Abnormal Operations / Miscellaneous
• QRH
- EVACUATION
- SMOKE / FUMES
ffs7gd.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.04 Page 14D
A380 L F2S
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04
DAY VISUAL
Start session with date 1st June at 16.30 factor 1 inserted on IOS to induce progressive day to
night flight
TRAINEE 2
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
INIT HOLDING POINT LFZZ 33R: Let the trainees compute the MTOW.
10,20 : In downwind, insert 2nd engine failure on the same wing and adjust visibility 8 km /
ceiling 1500’ AGL when reaching pattern altitude.
TRAINEE 1
25 : Call from the purser "Smoke in the cabin coming from OUTLETS".
Flight crew applies SMOKE / FUMES ABN PROC if the visibility in the cockpit is
sufficient and ECAM is available or refer to the QRH.
After 1 minute insert AIR COND SMOKE, to generate smoke in the cockpit.
Dense smoke in the cockpit : Crew apply SMOKE / FUMES REMOVAL and descent
to FL 100.
Cancel AIR COND SMOKE when PACKS 1 + 2 OFF. SMOKE GENERATOR
STOPS. Radar Vectors
28 : In downwind, set 3 ADR OFF for BUSS demo. Explain that the lower part of the
GREEN BAND is the target to fly before extending S/F configuration. The higher part
the target to retract. When configurated, target to fly is the middle of the green band.
ffs7gd.fm
ALOFT
STANDARD COURSE 02.05 Page 1
A380
ALOFT SYLLABI Issue 03 NOV 2007
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
02.05LOFT SYLLABI
The Airbus Line Oriented Flight Training (ALOFT) session is intended to provide crews with
opportunities to enhance their understanding of the A380 and to apply Crew Resource
Management principles to simulated regular airline flight.
Scenarios are intended to produce a busy environment, but should never overload the crew.
In many cases, there is no single 'right' answer but, using their skills and knowledge, the crew
should be able to reach a successful conclusion to each scenario. Alternative solutions may
provide useful, constructive post-flight discussion.
Relative simple failures are introduced during the flight to enable the session objectives to be
met.
To make ALOFT as valuable and realistic as possible, flight documentation (files available in
the “INST SUP FLIGHT” menu on Airbus People server) is provided by the instructor to the
trainees before the briefing.
The flight briefing will begin 1 hour before the scheduled simulator start time and will take
15-20 minutes. Thereafter the crew will have some time to study the documentation and, for
example, decide on the required fuel load, etc.
The take-off time for the flight is considered to be 30 minutes after the simulator session
starts.
02-05.fm
STANDARD COURSE 02.05 Page 2
A380
ALOFT SYLLABI Issue 03 NOV 2007
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
02.05
02-05.fm
CCQ A320 TO A340 COURSE
02.01 - INTRODUCTION
02-00CCQ.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.00 Page 2
A380 L FQF/G
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 01 JUL 2007
02.00
02-00CCQ.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.01 Page 1
A380 L FQF/G
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 01 JUL 2007
02.01INTRODUCTION
01 - GENERAL
B. REGULATION REQUIREMENTS
They are listed in the following document :
- JAR-FCL - JAR-OPS
- FAR 121 - FAR 142
- FAA Advisory Circular : AC 120.53
- JAA / FAA / Transport Canada : Common Procedures Document
The differences between the base and the difference aircraft are published in the Operator
Difference Requirement (ODR) tables approved by FAA/JAA.
Airbus course is based on generic ODR tables published by the manufacturer.
C. PREREQUISITES
• Valid and current ATPL
• Qualified on the base aircraft
• Minimum of 3 months of operation on the base aircraft
• Minimum of 150 flight hours on the base aircraft
IMPORTANT :
Pilots entering this course must be highly knowledgeable on base aircraft systems.
02 - COURSE ORGANISATION
A. COURSE DESCRIPTION
a) General
The CCQ training is divided into four different phases:
- Ground phase
- Handling phase
- Skill test
- Base training or ZFTT
A welcome, which takes place before the starting of the course, includes the training
center presentation, all administrative issues and the distribution of all training supports
that will be used by the trainee.
The reference airport used during most of the sessions is a generic airport called Airbus
Training Airport.
b) Ground phase
CBT:
The aircraft systems study is progressively introduced during the first 8 days and is
carried out in a classroom.
02-01.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.01 Page 2
A380 L FQF/G
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
The acquired knowledge will be reinforced with the use of the Maintenance and Flight
Training Device (MFTD).
The CBT is not defined to cover aircraft differences only: however, part of some systems
is common to A330/340 and A380.
MFTD:
The MFTD is used to reinforce the systems knowledge acquired in the CBT and to study
the new SOP’s or major differences between the A330/340 and A380 (in normal and
abnormal operations).
Sessions are prepared by the trainee using the trainee’s booklet, FCOM, Flight Crew
Training Manual (FCTM) and Procedure Data Package (PDP).
Questions and answers are part of the session and will be addressed before or during
the session.
The PDP will be presented at the instructor discretion to either refresh the procedures
common to both aircraft or to introduce new procedures related to the A380.
OIS / Performance:
One full day is dedicated to Onboard Information System (OIS) presentation and to per-
formance computation using the different applications.
Cabin:
Doors and slides operations are conducted in a specific Cabin Trainer device.
Systems test:
At the end of the ground phase the acquired knowledge will be evaluated using an elec-
tronic test based on a randomized questionnaire.
c) Handling phase
This phase conducted in the FFS is mostly dedicated to aircraft handling in Normal and
Abnormal operations.
All the differences listed in the approved Operator Difference Requirement (ODR) tables
will be covered during this phase as well as some exercises common to both A330/340
and A380.
d) Skill test
The skill test is defined according to the JAA requirements : for the time being, it is not a
skill test that only covers the differences.
02-01.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.01 Page 3
A380 L FQF/G
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
B. TRAINING DOCUMENTATION
-CFIT
DVD2
-REJECTED TAKE OFF
VIDEO BRIEFINGS
-UPSET RECOVERY
(To be given)
-COCKPIT DOORS
PAPER CONTENT
TRAINEE’S BOOKLET -RELEVANT CREW COURSE
(extract of FCTP: -BASE TRAINING SYLLABI
Flight Crew Training Program) -Set of 4 coloured cockpit panels
Extract of QRH
-SMOKE and EVACUATION procedures
(Quick Reference Handbook)
02-01.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.01 Page 4
A380 L FQF/G
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 01 JUL 2007
C. INSTRUCTOR BRIEFINGS
D. CRITERIA OF PROFICIENCY
1) SYSTEMS
b. Unsatisfactory Examination :
Corrective action using the CBT will be determined by the instructor in coordination with
Airbus Training Director. The student will then undertake a CBT examination.
• When both “Satisfactory” and “May need extra training” boxes are ticked
----> comments are required, and the following session must be assessed as :
----> use the specific Progress Incident Report (PIR) (see Page 9) to list and comment
the trainee’s difficulties as well as the number of additional training sessions
requested.
It must be reported without delay to Airbus Director of Training.
Additional training sessions (see Page 10) have to be commented and use the
same identification as the session involved.
02-01.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.01 Page 5
A380 L FQF/G
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
E. CRITERIA OF PROFICIENCY
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
1) SYSTEMS / PERFORMANCE
UNSATISFACTORY
Instructor name
and signature
a. Evaluation during CBT Phase :
Code |____|____|____|
Code |____|____|____|
Code |____|____|____|
Code |____|____|____|
On completion of this phase, a written multiple choice examination will be completed.
sticker
Trainee
The minimum level required, to be declared proficient, is determined by the Airline, but
is never below 80%.
or
SATISFACTORY
b. Unsatisfactory Examination :
signature
Corrective action using the CBT will be determined by the instructor in coordination with
Trainee
Airbus Training Director. The student will then undertake a CBT examination.
• When both “Satisfactory” and “May need extra training” boxes are ticked
----> comments are required ( ), and the following session must be assessed as :
box is ticked
When “Unsatisfactory” box is ticked ( ):
----> use the specific Progress Incident Report (PIR) (see Page 7) to list and comment
* : - Comments are mandatory when May need extra training
the trainee’s difficulties as well as the number of additional training sessions
requested ( ).
- Write None if no specific comments are needed
Additional training sessions (see Page 8) have to be commented and use the
same identification as the session involved ( ).
Date
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
Sessions
MFTD A
MFTD 1
MFTD 2
MFTD 3
A380
02-01.fm
02-01.fm
CCQ A330/A340 TO A380 COURSE (L FQF/G)
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
HANDLING PHASE Trainee
A380 sticker
A380
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
FFS 1
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
FFS 2
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
* : - Comments are mandatory when May need extra training box is ticked * *The following session MUST be assessed as SATISFACTORY or UNSATISFACTORY
- Write None if no specific comments are needed
Page 6
SKTEST
Scenario : ❐ 1 ❐2 All the items of the scenario have been performed as
(Please write the JAR references for UNSATISFACTORY items) defined in the FCTP
|____|____| / |____|____| /
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
INTRODUCTION
RE-SKTEST
02.01 CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE
L FQF/G
* : - Comments are mandatory when May need extra training box is ticked * *The following session MUST be assessed as SATISFACTORY or UNSATISFACTORY
Page 7
02-01.fm
02-01.fm
CCQ A330/A340 TO A380 COURSE (L FQF/G)
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
BASE TRAINING Trainee
A380 sticker
A380
BASE TRAINING
02.01 CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE
L FQF/G
02-01.fm
CCQ A330/A340 TO A380 COURSE (L FQF/G)
02-01.fm
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
ADDITIONAL TRAINING SESSIONS Trainee
A380 sticker
A380
UNSATISFACTORY
SATISFACTORY
Trainee s Instructor s name
Session* Date (DD/MM/YYYY) Comments
signature and signature
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
Code |____|____|____|
❐ Spare
|____|____| / |____|____| /
❐ Remedial
|____|____|____|____|
| FFS |____|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
Code |____|____|____|
❐ Spare
|____|____| / |____|____| /
❐ Remedial
|____|____|____|____|
INTRODUCTION
FFS |____|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE
Code |____|____|____|
❐ Spare
|____|____| / |____|____| /
❐ Remedial
|____|____|____|____|
02.01
|
FFS |____|
L FQF/G
Page 10
Note: If translator is required, CBT and SYSTEM TEST will be Projected CBT with instructor:
the ground school duration must be adapted.
02-02.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.02 Page 2
A380 L FQF/G
TRAINING FOOTPRINT
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.02
02-02.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 1
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
MFTD A (COCKPIT AND SYSTEMS PRESENTATION)
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ CALM 9999 13/12 1013
LFLL CALM 9999 10/8 1013 INIT TAKE OFF - LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
Co-route AIBLYS
ACTIVE / INIT
FLT NBR A/L ID 101 REFER TO SESSION GUIDE
385 t 65 t
GW FOB
847 000 Ib 143 000 Ib
320t
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 Ib
NOTES
RWY COND DRY FPLN : REFER CO ROUTE
AIR COND ON (SID ONZON 1N)
ANTI ICE OFF PAX NUMBER : 303
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 126 TOGA V1 125 TOGA
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftdA.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 2
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
mftdA.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 2A
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• To demonstrate the use of the training device.
• To present a general view of the cockpit including flight instruments and major aircraft
systems controls and indications.
• To present the Less Paper Cockpit philosophy
mftdAgd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 2B
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
MFTD INITIALIZATION :
• The instructor completes the MFTD set up.
• INIT TAKE OFF at Airbus Airport
External power 2 and 3 : ON
APU running (APU Bleed ON)
Doors closed and slides armed
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
FMS loaded
SESSION GUIDE :
NOTE :
Do not explain Airbus aircraft systems but present the following according to the
trainee's aeronautical background by introducing the Airbus cockpit philosophy.
Remember that, at this stage, the trainee did not study all aircraft systems.
C. FMS :
MFD + KCCU : show only that KCCU is the unit to use for interaction on pages displayed on
MFD (Multi Function Display). Explain that KCCU doesn’t interact with ECAM only ECP can
do it.
D. OIS :
- Less paper cockpit philosophy
- FLT OPS STS
- FLT OPS Menu
• T.O. PERF
• LOAD SHEET
• LDG PERF
• IN-FLT PERF
• OPS LIBRARY
- Don’t explain all the applications: this will be done during the Performance course.
mftdAgd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 2C
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
- EFIS
PFD : Flight parameters + memos (3 lines max) and limitations (8 lines max displaying
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
limitations that have a direct impact on A/C flight performances)
ND : Flight navigation information + vertical display zone
- ECAM
E/WD : engine primary parameters + bottom part :
- Normal C/L (requested by the flight crew via the ECP)
- Abnormal and emergency procedures (requested by the flight crew via the ECP)
- Alerts
- Limitations (left column : ALL PHASES / right column : APPR & LDG)
- Memos (left column : TO and LDG memos / right column : all other memos)
SD :
- Displays automatically the system page corresponding to 1 of the 12 flight phases.
- Explain flight phase inhibition
-
3 zones :
- System display page (with MORE info on WHEEL, FUEL, STS pages)
- Permanent data (TAT, SAT, ISA, time, GW, GWCG, FOB)
- ATC mailbox
ECP :
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Explain briefly hard keys functions
mftdAgd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 2D
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
- C/L completed indication: Color coding (blue when C/L not completed / grey when com-
pleted)
- C/L RESET indication
- STS indication
- C/L CLEAR bar
INIT FL 100
1. Explain alerts philosophy and procedure automatically displayed on ECAM
(sensed procedure)
• Alerts levels and priority rules : advisory then levels 1,2,3
• Failure types : independent, primary, secondary
• Color coding (red, amber, green, white, blue, magenta, grey)
2. Explain ABN PROC activated manually on ECAM by the crew (Not-Sensed procedures)
• Associated Alert Level
• Not activated : differences of color coding
• When activated, transferred into the ECAM and update of STS and limitations
Note : Explain that some failures are not detected by ECAM but directly on the interface itself
(eg : VHF failure displayed on RMP).
Insert the following failures in sequence without applying ECAM actions. The purpose is to
demonstrate alerts levels, priority rules, failures types and color coding.
mftdAgd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 2E
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Restore all systems
Explain :
- Alert types (independent, primary, secondary)
- Items detected / not detected by ECAM (preceeded by a square to be ticked) : same color
coding as above. Explain that any action ticked inadvertently is reversible by unticking it
- Overflow arrow
- MORE indication on STS page. All the ECAM alerts which have an impact on the landing
performance are listed in the "ALERT IMPACTING LDG PERF" part of the MORE STS
PAGE.
The flight crew selects the applicable ECAM alert(s) in the OIS LDG PERF application to
compute LDG DIST and/or VAPP.
Point out that 3 indications may be displayed as applicable on the MORE page:
INOP SYS REDUND,
ALERTS IMPACTING LDG PERF,
CANCELLED CAUTION
- Deferred procedure (ALL PHASES, or APP & LDG) : appears in the C/L menu (amber
when not completed / white when completed).
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Explain FAILURE PENDING INDICATION
If an alert or ABN PROC is displayed but has not been cleared, a FAILURE PENDING mes-
sage appears on the E/WD, when the crew displays a C/L (ex : APPROACH)
When the C/L and the C/L menu are cleared, the alert or the not sensed ABN PROC reap-
pears on the E/WD and the message disappears.
mftdAgd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 2F
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
mftdAgd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 3
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
MFTD 1 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 270/10 9999 15/8 1010
LFLL 200/10 9999 18/12 1010 QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
VR FLEX 56 VR FLEX 57
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd1.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 4
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
MFTD 1 - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 270/10 9999 15/8 1010
QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
VR FLEX 56 VR FLEX 57
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd1.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 4A
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 01 JUL 2007
02.0302.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Highlight the differences in terms of procedures through out all phases of flight in normal
operation
• Apply task sharing and communication
• Study and practice initialization of the FMS and review the various functions using the new
interface
• Present the new systems using ECAM pages
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW
Not applicable.
B. NEW EXERCICES / REFERENCES
Standard Flight profile - SOP’s
• FCOM/Procedures/Normal Procedures/Standard Operating Procedures
• FCOM/Procedures/Normal Procedures/Task Sharing
• FCTM/NORMAL OPERATIONS
• PDP : ALL PHASES Flow pattern
FMS: Initialization - New interfaces and functions
• FCOM/Procedures/Normal Procedures/Standard Operating Procedures/Cockpit
preparation/MFD FMS INITIALIZATION
• FCOM/Aircraft Systems/22 - AFS-Flight Management System/System description/Flight
Planning
Normal checklists
• FCOM/Procedures/Normal Procedures/Normal Checklists
Engine Start with External Pneumatic Power
• FCOM/Procedures/Supplementary Procedures/Engines/Unusual Starting Procedures
Use of RMP
• FCOM/Aircraft systems/23 - Communication/How to use the RMP/How to tune a frequency
FCU Backup
• FCOM/Aircraft systems/22 - AFS - Flight Guidance/Abnormal Operations/FCU Backup
C. SUPPORT
• Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCOM
• FCTM
* Note: In the FCTM look at procedures only and disregard the information related to handling-
characteristics
mftd1gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 4B
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
1 :Use the ECAM ELEC page to show the electrical supply using external power
and APU :
Highlight the priorities
- During cockpit preparation: highlight the differences in ECAM system pages
(Hydraulic, Fuel, Wheel)
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
- FMS preparation
- SURV page: check default settings
Highlight that compared to the A330/340 Radar, EGPWS, TCAS controls are
grouped on a single panel.
Show all the functions on the SURV CTL PNL and then call the MFD specific
page dedicated to SURV.
- INIT hard key: press
- STATUS: explain the page and don’t go to FMS P/N (Part Number)
- INIT: Do not explain all the REQUEST options
- IRS: Show the option to “ALIGN ON OTHER REF”
- DEPARTURE:
-Demonstrate the use of TMPY F-PLN
-F-PLN review according to the electronic F-PLN or to the charts
- NAVAIDS:
-Show TUNED FOR DISPLAY
-Show the TUNED FOR FMS NAV: how to deselect NAVAIDS
- FUEL § LOAD
- PERF:
-Show all the flight phases
- SEC INDEX:
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Note: During aircraft initialization, highlight the fact that messages are displayed in the
message pad at the bottom of the MFD: CLEAR INFO function is used to clear the
messages
5 :- Pitch trim: explain the pitch trim setting (PFD display and Pitch trim sw)
- Show the controls for Taxi cameras, Video on ECAM and OANS
mftd1gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 4C
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
8 :- During FMS exercises demonstrate the access to functions through the short cut
key and through the menu at each revised waypoint
- DIRECT TO: demonstrate the four accesses and highlight the differences in CRS
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
IN and OUT
- OFFSET: highlight the differences
- Different access to BRG/DIST TO
9 :- Descent preparation: use the predefined flow (ACTIVE, POSITION and SEC)
11 :- Highlight the fact that the deceleration rate is slower than on A330/340: Slats /
Flaps and Landing gear extension takes more time
- Explain the differences on the speed scale displayed on PFD (Flaps auto exten-
sion, short term managed speed)
The crew has already inserted the ZFW / ZFWCG / FOB figures (refer to syllabus) in
the FMS / FUEL&LOAD page
Explain that the FQMS computes the fuel distribution to ensure a CG target for take-
off of approximately 39,5% (SD page).
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Observe the TRIM TANK fuel quantity and note the value.
The FQMS normally receives (via the avionics system) approx every 10 min an
updated ZFWCG sent by the airline operations via DATALINK (the ground engineer
may also update it using the OMT (laptop located at the rear of the cockpit)), in order
to ensure proper fuel distribution (especially quantity in the trim tank) and final
GWCG target of 39,5%
The crew inserts the new figures in the FMS / ACTIVE / FUEL&LOAD page.
Observe that the current fuel distribution does not change. Therefore the FQMS
computes a new GWCG according to the updated ZFW / ZFWCG inserted by the
crew in the FMS.
The crew checks that the updated GWCG is within operational limits:
mftd1gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 4D
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
• If YES:
SD).
If the difference is within 1%, the CM1 signs the LOADSHEET.
If the difference is above 1%, investigate the causes (wrong figures insertion, wrong
fuel distribution, FQMS failure….).
• If NO:
To demonstrate GWCG out of operational limits, the instructor inserts on the IOS
the new initial figures (make sure that the crew does not change the figures on
the FMS FUEL & LOAD page to allow the fuel to be redistributed):
ZFW= 320 T
ZFWCG= 32%
FOB= 83 T
Give the crew an updated LOADSHEET: The loading set up has changed:
New figures to be inserted by the crew in the FMS:
ZFW= 320 T
ZFWCG= 38%
The crew pushes the AUTO GND XFR pb-sw on the OVHD MAINTENANCE panel:
Observe on the FUEL SD, the FWD transfer done by the FQMS to obtain a GWCG
of 39,5%. The FQMS will automatic stop the GND XFR when the GWCG 39,5% is
reached.
Due to time constraint (give a new slot for departure), stop the exercise as soon as
the GWCG has turned green or around 41% of GWCG. Explain that it should take
approx 17 min for the fuel to be transferred forward in the feed tanks, in this case.
The transfer rate is approx 600kg per min.
The crew should crosscheck on the OIS the FQMS computation obtained at the end
of the AUTO GND XFR. Crosscheck the TOCG (OIS) versus the GWCG (SD):
If the difference is within 1%, the CM1 signs the LOADSHEET.
If the difference is above 1%, investigate the causes.
22 :Demonstrate how to insert an ALT constraint using the menu at a revised waypoint
or inserting the constraint directly in the F/PLN
23 :Insert FCU 1 FAULT to get CAPT EFIS CTL PNL: demonstrate the use of FCU
backup: restore after demonstration
mftd1gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 4E
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
27 :Select the PERF page and explain the differences compared to the A330/340:
different phases of flight in go around
After the GA acceleration altitude:
- Explain that the FMS recovers prediction and vertical managed profile after the
acceleration altitude (CLB, ALT CRZ, DES are available during the missed
approach procedure).
- Explain that the CRZ FL is automatically updated and is the higher of:
• the value selected in the AFS - CP or
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
• the higher value of the FPLN (MAP + previous approach)
29 :Demonstrate how to activate (SWAP) a SEC F/PLN after a missed approach proce-
dure
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
mftd1gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 4F
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
mftd1gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 5
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
MFTD 2 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 360/10 9999 15/10 1010
LFLL 270/08 9999 14/10 1010 QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R /GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd2.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 6
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
MFTD 2 - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 360/10 2000 BKN 008 5/2 998
BIKF 200/05 9999 -10/-15 1000 QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd2.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 6A
A380 L FQF/G
FQF/
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 01 JUL 2007
02.0302.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Practice SOP’s using proper callouts and cross checks
• Highlight the differences in failure handling using the new ECAM procedures
• Study the Non Precision Approaches using the FLS function (if not retrofitted on A330/340)
• Study and practice new FMS functions
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW
• FMS initialization - New interfaces and functions
• SOP: Normal Operations - TASK Sharing
B. EXERCICES / REFERENCES
OIT: Use of Take-off performance and MEL applications·
• FCTM/NORMAL OPERATIONS/Flight Preparation/MEL
ENGINE START FAULT
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/70-Engines/ENG START FAULT
ECAM Procedures: new philosophy
• FCTM/OPERATIONAL PHILOSOPHY/ECAM
• PDP: ECAM PHILOSOPHY
CDS reconfiguration
• FCOM/Aircraft Systems/31-Indicating-Recording/CDS/Abnormal Operations
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/31-Indicating-Recording/CDS
FAULT
FUEL LEAK
• FCOM/Aircraft Systems/28-fuel/Abnormal Operations/Fuel leak Detection
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/28-Fuel/FUEL LEAK
DETECTED
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/70-Engines/ENG FUEL LEAK
BRAKES: system review
• FCOM/ Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/32-Landing Gear/BRAKES
FAULT
FMS: FMC FAULT
• FCOM/Aircraft Systems/22-AFS-Flight Management/Abnormal Operations/ FMC FAULT·
FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/22-Flight Management System/
AUTOFLT FMC FAULT and AUTO FLT FMS FAULT
Non Precision Approach using FLS
• FCOM/Procedures/Normal Procedures/Standard Operating Procedures/Non Precision
Approach
• FCTM/Normal Operations/Non Precision Approach
• PDP/Non Precision Approach
mftd2gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 6B
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 01 JUL 2007
C. SUPPORT
• Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCOM
• FCTM
* Note: In the FCTM look at procedures only and disregard the information related to handling-
characteristics
mftd2gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 6C
A380 L FQF/G
FQF/
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Then, perform a manual start on engine 1 with hot start to highlight the difference of
protections between AUTO and MAN. Restore and perform a quick start through IOS
panel.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Insert ELEC BAT 1 FAULT (level 2-Master Caution + SC)
Insert HYD G RSVR LEVEL LO (level 2-Master Caution + SC)
Insert ENGINE 1 FIRE (level 3-Master Warning + CRC)
Insert LEFT MAIN AVIONICS SMOKE (level 3 - Master Warning + CRC)
Restore
mftd2gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 6D
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
- Demonstrate how to access to the NOT SENSED PROCEDURES using the ABN
PROC pb on the ECP and show the list of procedures
Activate the not sensed L/G LDG with Abnormal WING & BODY L/Gs : Explain that
there are a few procedures whose management is different.
Those PROC are displayed until landing, disregarding normal C/L (e.g. LANDING
WITH 2 ENGs INOP ABN PROC)
23 :- Insert a fuel leak (1000 kg/minute) - FUEL LEAK DETECTED is triggered: compare
Fuel at departure with fuel used + FOB and complete ECAM actions
1st scenario
- Leak is coming from the engine : after engine shut down, do not reset the failure but
insert 0 kg/min
2d scenario
- Leak is coming from the feed tank
- Do not play this scenario but explain the difference to the trainee
Restore
mftd2gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 6E
A380 L FQF/G
FQF/
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
25 : - To accelerate the fuel jettison, use fuel tank distribution on the IOS and set XFR
and TRIM TKS to 0 in order to keep FEED TANKS FULL only. Stop at GW 420 t.
29 : Fail the G/S and brief the crew that he must deselect the G/S
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
mftd2gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 6F
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
mftd2gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 7
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
MFTD 3 - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 020/15 9999 -20/-21 1025
LFLL 010/15 9999 -20/-21 1025 QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd3.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 8
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
MFTD 3 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 020/15 9999 -20/-21 1025
LFLL 010/15 9999 -20/-21 1025 QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd3.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 8A
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 01 JUL 2007
02.0302.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE
• To highlight the differences in abnormal procedures using the new ECAM procedures
• To practice SOP’s using proper call outs and cross checks
• To review new FMS functions
02 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. REVIEW
• FMS initialization
• SOP: Normal operations
• ECAM procedures: new philosophy
• FCU Backup
B. EXERCISES / REFERENCES
ENGINE FAILURE
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/70-Engines/ENG FAIL
• PDP: ENGINE OUT AFTER TAKE-OFF
ENGINE RELIGHT
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/70-Engines/ENG RELIGHT IN
FLIGHT
G+Y SYS PRESS LO
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/29-Hydraulic/G+Y SYS PRESS
LO
• FCTM/Abnormal Operations/Hydraulic/G+Y Hydraulic Failures
• PDP: DUAL HYDRAULIC FAILURE
AIR COND SMOKE
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/26-Fire and Smoke Protection/
SMOKE-FUMES AVIONICS SMOKE
• FCTM/ABNORMAL OPERATIONS/Fire Protection/Smoke-Fumes
AVIONIC SMOKE
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/26-Fire and Smoke/L(R)
AVIONICS SMOKE
SLATS LOCKED
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/27-Slats-Flaps/ SLATS LOCKED
and SLATS FAULT
ENGINE TAIL PIPE FIRE
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/70-Engines/TAIL PIPE FIRE
mftd3gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 8B
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 01 JUL 2007
C. SUPPORT
• Procedure data package (PDP)
• FCOM
• FCTM
* Note: in the FCTM look at procedures only and disregard information related to handling
characteristics
mftd3gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 8C
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
9,21 : - Trainee 2:
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
- Show the AFS CP Back up page and all the associated functions
- Demonstrate scroll wheel use and restore: flying demonstration will take place dur-
ing the second part of the session.
- Trainee 1:
- Insert FCU 1 + 2 fault to trigger CAPT AFS CP FAULT. Explain that CAPT and F/O
EFIS CP are also lost in this case.
- Keep the failure until the end of the missed approach
- Provide radar vectors to the crew in order to allow them to practice the use of FCU
back up
10 : - Cabin crew warns the flight crew that smoke is coming from the AIR COND outlets
in the Main and Upper cabin (specific smell: oil burnt)
- The instructor warns the crew that there is also smoke in the cockpit
- Flight crew applies SMOKE / FUMES ABN PROC if the visibility in the cockpit is
sufficient and ECAM is available or refer to the QRH
- Stress communications between cabin crew and cockpit
- No change when PACK 1 is selected to OFF
- When PACK 2 is selected to OFF (after 2 minutes) insert ENGINE 3 - OIL PRESS
LO
- With PACK 2 OFF Cabin crew will advise the crew that smoke starts to disappear
from the Main and Upper cabin and the instructor informs the crew that smoke is
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
removed from the Cockpit
16,27: - FLS approach in cold weather conditions. Explain that the FLS profile takes into
account the temperature corrections (use of tutorial NPA flown with FLS function,
COLD WEATHER)
mftd3gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 8D
A380 L FQF/G
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 01 JUL 2007
20 : - Insert a L MAIN AVNCS SMOKE and tell the crew that a little bit of smoke is coming
from Pedestal panel
- The crew will apply the ECAM procedure and then refer to the paper checklist
- Cancel the failure when GEN 3 and 4 have been selected to OFF and tell the crew
that the smoke disappears
- Explain the remaining of the procedure if the smoke was still present
26 :- During missed approach, insert a slats locked (by wing tip break) during slats
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
29 :- During engine shut down warn the crew that flames are coming out from the Engine
2. Show where to find the Tail pipe fire procedure (No differences from the A330/
340).
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
mftd3gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 1
A380 L FQF/G
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 1 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 060/10 6000 BKN 005 20/12 1010 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT GATE A1 - LFZZ 06 - GW 540 t
FLT NBR A/L ID 101 Co route AIBAIB
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL
PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
CPNY RTE AIBAIB (AIRCRAFT ELECTRICALLY SUPPLIED)
1 - COCKPIT PREPARATION
ALTN RTE AIBLYS
2 - ENGINE START
CRZ FL FL 120 CRZ TEMP -10°C 3 - AFTER START
4 - TAXI - 180° TURN ON RUNWAY
CI 90 TROPO 36090 5 - TAKE OFF v v
6 - CLIMB FL 120 v v v
TRIP WIND HD 20
7 - AIRWORK v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD 8 - DESCENT v v v
9 - ILS APP - LFZZ 33R v v
540 t 200 t 1:20 10 - LANDING
GW FOB
1 188 000 Ib 440 000 Ib
INIT HOLDING POINT LFZZ 33R - GW 385t
340 t ZFW 320 t - FOB 65 t
ZFW ZFWCG 34 % 250/18 OVC 006
748 000 Ib
Co route PAT 33R
NOTES
RWY COND DRY FPLN : Refer to Co-route 11 - TAKE OFF - CROSSWIND v v
AIR COND ON (SID ATN 1E) 12 - RADAR VECTORS v v v
ANTI ICE OFF PAX 351 13 - ILS APP (RAW DATA) - LFZZ 33R v v
14 - GO AROUND v v
15 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
E 1:45 16 - LANDING - CROSSWIND
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF INIT HOLDING POINT LFZZ 33R - GW 385t
CAVOK - 350/10
LFZZ 06 / GW 540 t LFZZ 06 / GW 540 t
Co route PAT 33R
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
17 - TAKE OFF v v
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX 18 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
19 - REJECTED LANDING v v
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED 20 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
2:05 21 - LANDING
ffs1.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 2
A380 L FQF/G
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 1 - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 350/10 kt 6000 OVC 012 20/12 Q 1010 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT HOLDING POINT LFZZ 33R - GW 385t
2:20
FLT NBR A/L ID 101 Co route PAT 33R
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL
24 - TAKE OFF v v
CPNY RTE PAT 33R 25 - RADAR VECTORS v v v
26 - ILS APP - LFZZ 33R v v
ALTN RTE AIBLYS
27 - LANDING
CRZ FL 4000 ft CRZ TEMP +10°
INIT HOLDING POINT LFZZ 33R - GW 385t
CI 90 TROPO 36090 2:45 CAVOK 250/18
Co route PAT 33R
TRIP WIND -
28 - TAKE OFF - CROSSWIND v v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD
29 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
30 - REJECTED LANDING v v
385 t 65 t v v
GW FOB 31 - VISUAL PATTERN
847 000 Ib 143 000 Ib 32 - LANDING - CROSSWIND
320 t
ZFW ZFWCG 34 % INIT TAKE OFF LFZZ 06 - GW 540 t
704 000 Ib 3:00
ZFW 320 t - FOB 220 t - Co route PAT 33R
NOTES
RWY COND DRY FPLN : Refer to Co-route 33 - TAKE OFF - REJECTED v v
AIR COND ON (SID 1B)
INIT TAKE OFF LFZZ 06 - GW 540 t
ANTI ICE OFF
350/10 OVC 006 - Co route AIBAIB1
34 - TAKE OFF v v
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272 35 - CLIMB FL 70 v v v
36 - FMS 1 + 2 FAULT v v v
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
37 - DESCENT v v v
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
38 - ILS APP (RAW DATA) - LFZZ 33R v v
V1 122 TOGA V1 125 TOGA 39 - GO AROUND v v
40 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
VR 126 v FLEX 57 VR 126 v FLEX 57 03:45 41 - LANDING
42 - AFTER LANDING
43 - TAXI
V2 132 DERATED V2 132 DERATED
44 - PARKING
45 - SECURING THE AIRCRAFT
FLAPS 3 THS FOR FLAPS 3 THS FOR
ffs1.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 2A
A380 L FQF/G
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 01 JUL 2007
02.0302.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• To handle the A380 in normal operations using experience from the A330 / 340
• To practice SOP’s applicable to the A380
• To review specific changes in panels and controls during cockpit preparation
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW
• SOP’s - Task sharing
• FMS: initialization and use during all flight phases
• Use of OIS / LAPTOP for take-off performance computation
C. SUPPORT
• Briefing Guides
• Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCOM
• FCTM
ffs1gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 2B
A380 L FQF/G
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 01 JUL 2007
ffs1gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 2C
A380 L FQF/G
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
- Oxygen masks
- Audio : hand mike, headset, RMP, ACP, PTT
- Use of taxi camera, airport navigation
- First FFS handling characteristics review (NWS, taxi, brake check, flight control
check, take off side stick position, rotation technique)
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
7 :Reduce GW to 390 t before exercices
- FD off with the VV
- Practice some steep turns
- Highlight the fact that the handling characteristics are similar to the A330/340
- Protections are identical: no need for demonstration however ask the pilot to
perform an emergency pull up with maximum bank angle
- Transfer controls and repeat for the second pilot
13 :For practice only : no differences between A330/340 and A380: however this item
will be checked during skill test.
ffs1gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 2D
A380 L FQF/G
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
ffs1gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 3
A380 L FQF/G
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 2 - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 270/10 6000 BKN 008 3/1 1002 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT GATE A1 - LFZZ 24 - GW 569 t
FLT NBR A/L ID 102 Co route AIBKEF
FROM LFZZ TO BIKF ALTN EINN
PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
CPNY RTE AIBKEF (AIRCRAFT ELECTRICALLY SUPPLIED)
1 - COCKPIT PREPARATION
ALTN RTE KEFSNN
2 - ENGINE START
CRZ FL FL 340 CRZ TEMP -58°C 3 - AFTER START
4 - TAXI
CI 90 TROPO 36300 5 - TAKE OFF (MTOW) v v
6 - CLIMB FL 70 v v v
TRIP WIND HD 030
7 - RETURN TO DEPARTURE v v v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD 8 - RNAV APP (FLS) - LFZZ 24 v v v
1:20 9 - LANDING - OVERWEIGHT
569 t 219 t 10 - 180° ON RUNWAY
GW FOB
1 232 000 Ib 462 000 Ib
INIT HOLDING POINT LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
350 t ZFW 320 t - FOB 65 t
ZFW ZFWCG 37 % 290/12 BKN 012
770 000 Ib
Co route AIBAIB1
NOTES
RWY COND WET FPLN : Refer to Co-route 11 - TAKE OFF - WINDSHEAR v v
AIR COND OFF DEP : Refer to session guide 12 - CLIMB FL 70 v v v
ANTI ICE ON PAX NUMBER : 450 13 - ADR 1 + 2 + 3 FAULT v
14 - DESCENT v
15 - ILS APP - LFZZ 33R v
E 1:50 16 - LANDING
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 24 / GW 569 t LFZZ 24 / GW 569 t
V1 v TOGA V1 v TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs2.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 4
A380 L FQF/G
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 2 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 270/10 6000 BKN 008 3/1 1002 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT HOLDING POINT LFZZ 24 - GW 569 t
FLT NBR A/L ID 102 Co route AIBKEF
FROM LFZZ TO BIKF ALTN EINN
2:00 17 - TAKE OFF (MTOW) v v
CPNY RTE AIBKEF 18 - RADAR VECTORS v v v
19 - VOR-DME APP (FLS) - LFZZ 33R v v v v
ALTN RTE KEFSNN
20 - LANDING - OVERWEIGHT
CRZ FL FL 340 CRZ TEMP -58°C
INIT HOLDING POINT LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
CI 90 TROPO 36300 ZFW 320 t - FOB 65 t
290/12 BKN 012
TRIP WIND HD 030 Co route PAT 33R
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD
2:30 21 - TAKE OFF - WINDSHEAR v v
22 - CLIMB TO 4000 ft v v v
569 t 219 t
GW FOB 23 - NAV ALL AIR DATA DISAGREE v
1 232 000 Ib 462 000 Ib
24 - ILS APP - LFZZ 33R v
350 t 3:05 25 - LANDING
ZFW ZFWCG 37 %
770 000 Ib
INIT HOLDING POINT LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
NOTES CAVOK 350/10
RWY COND DRY FPLN : Refer to Co-route Co route AIBAIB
AIR COND OFF DEP: Refer to session guide
ANTI ICE ON PAX NUMBER : 400 26 - TAKE OFF v v
27 - CLIMB FL 80 v v v
28 - ALL GENERATORS FAULT v
29 - DESCENT v
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272 30 - ILS APP - LFZZ 06 - DIRECT LAW v
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF 3:45 31 - LANDING
LFZZ 24 / GW 569 t LFZZ 24 / GW 569 t
IF 2 CAPTAIN: INIT APPROACH LFZZ 06
V1 v TOGA V1 v TOGA
32 - ILS APPROACH (EMER ELEC CONF) v
VR FLEX VR FLEX 33 - LANDING
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs2.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 4A
A380 L FQF/G
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.0302.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
- To review differences in emergency electrical configuration procedures
- To practice SOP’s related to the new ECAM interface
- To practice new functions specific to the A380: Back Up Speed, FLS approaches
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW
• SOP’s - Task sharing
• Non Precision Approach using FLS
• Take-off and landing techniques
C. SUPPORT
• Briefing guides
• Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCOM
• FCTM
ffs2gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 4B
A380 L FQF/G
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
4,17 : Clearance for departure : RWY heading to 2000 ft - Right turn to intercept ATN 240°
radial inbound. Climb to FL70. Squawk : 4210
7 :- Decrease GW to 420t
- Return to departure: Radar Vectors for RNAV 24 using FLS function
- Notify the crew that they don’t have enough time for jettison
13 :- For BUSS demonstration, the instructor will turn off the three ADR, when aircraft is
cleaned up.
- The crew will complete the associated ECAM actions
- Instructor activates the "Crash inhibit" function
Weather : CAVOK
18 :- After ATN radial interception provide radar vectors for VOR-DME approach
RWY 33R
19 :- Decrease GW to 420 t
- The crew will perform the Overweight landing ABN PROC but will not compute the
landing distance (same as previous exercise)
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
29 :Check that the crew computes correctly the landing distance and selects the longest
runway available
32 :- INIT Approach 2
- Complete all ECAM actions before simulator release
Note:
For standard crew, no need to repeat the approach in EMER ELEC CONFIG.
ffs2gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 5
A380 L FQF/G
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 3 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 300/15 8000 OVC 010 25/12 1020 Time EVENTS
ATHR
NIGHT VISUAL
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT HOLDING POINT - LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
FLT NBR A/L ID 103 Co route PAT 33R
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL
PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
CPNY RTE PAT 33R (AIRCRAFT ELECTRICALLY SUPPLIED)
1 - COCKPIT PREPARATION
ALTN RTE -
2 - ENGINE START
CRZ FL 4000 ft CRZ TEMP +10°C 3 - AFTER START
4 - TAXI
CI 90 TROPO 36090 5 - TAKE OFF v v
6 - CLIMB TO 4000 FT v v v
TRIP WIND -
7 - FLAPS LOCKED (WING TIP BRAKES) v v v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD 8 - VOR-DME APP (FLS) - LFZZ 33R v v v v
1:00 9 - LANDING - FLAPS JAMMED
385 t 65 t
GW FOB INIT HOLDING POINT LFZZ 33R : GW 490 t
847 000 Ib 143 000 Ib
ZFW 350 t - FOB 140 t
320 t Co route PAT 33R
ZFW ZFWCG 37 %
704 000 Ib
10 - TAKE OFF - ENGINE FAILURE v v
NOTES 11 - RADAR VECTORS v v v
RWY COND DRY F/PLN : Refer Co-route 12 - ILS APP - ONE ENGINE OUT - LFZZ 33R v v
AIR COND ON (SID 1B) 13 - GO AROUND - ONE ENGINE OUT v v
ANTI ICE OFF 14 - RADAR VECTORS v v v
15 - LOC B/C APP (FLS) - ONE ENGINE OUT
v v
LFZZ 15L
E 1:40 16 - LANDING - ONE ENGINE OUT
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
INIT HOLDING POINT LFZZ 33R : GW 385 t
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
CAVOK
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
Co route PAT 33R
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
17 - TAKE OFF - ENGINE FAILURE v v
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX 18 - RADAR VECTORS v v v
19 - SECOND ENGINE FAILURE v v v
20 - ILS APP - LFZZ 33R v v
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
2:10 21 - LANDING - TWO ENGINES OUT
FLAPS 3 THS FOR FLAPS 3 THS FOR INIT TAKE OFF - LFZZ 24 : GW 560 t
ZFW 360 t - FOB 200 t - CAT II
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF RR TRENT 972 : Conf 1+F - V1:141 - VR:
LFZZ 33R / GW 490 t LFZZ 33R /GW 490 t 164 - V2: 171 - Flex 39° C
V1 131 v TOGA V1 133 v TOGA EA GP 7272 : V1:148 - VR: 165 - V2:171 -
Flex 37° C
ffs3.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 6
A380 L FQF/G
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 3 - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 300/15 8000 OVC 010 25/12 1020 Time EVENTS
ATHR
NIGHT TIME
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT HOLDING POINT - LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
FLT NBR A/L ID 103 Co route PAT 33R
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL
25 - TAKE OFF v v
CPNY RTE PAT 33R 26 - CLIMB 4000 ft v v v
27 - FLAPS LOCKED (WING TIP BRAKES) v v v
ALTN RTE -
28 - NDB APPR - (FLS) - LFZZ 33R v v v v
2:40 29 - LANDING - FLAPS JAMMED
CRZ FL 4000 ft CRZ TEMP +10°C
CI 90 TROPO 36090 INIT HOLDING POINT LFZZ 33R : GW 490 t
ZFW 350 t - FOB 140 t
TRIP WIND - Co route PAT 33R
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD
30 - TAKE OFF - ENGINE FAILURE v v
31 - RADAR VECTORS v v v
385 t 65 t
GW FOB 32 - ILS APP - ONE ENGINE OUT - LFZZ 33R v v
847 000 Ib 143 000 Ib
33 - GO AROUNG - ONE ENGINE OUT v v
320 t 34 - RADAR VECTORS v v v
ZFW ZFWCG 37 % 35 - VOR - DME APP (FLS) - ONE ENGINE
704 000 Ib v v
OUT - LFZZ 33R
NOTES 3:20 36 - LANDING - ONE ENGINE OUT
RWY COND DRY F/PLN : Refer Co-route
AIR COND ON (SID 1B) INIT HOLDING POINT LFZZ 33R : GW 385 t
ANTI ICE OFF CAVOK
Co route PAT 33R
ffs3.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 6A
A380 L FQF/G
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 01 JUL 2007
02.0302.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE
• To practice the engine failure on A380 highlighting the fact that the procedure is similar
• To operate the aircraft in normal and abnormal situations according to SOP’s
02 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. REVIEW
• SOP’s - Task sharing
• Non Precision Approach using FLS
• Rejected Take-off
C. SUPPORT
• Briefing guides
• Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCTM
• FCOM
ffs3gd.fm
CCQ A330 / A340 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 6B
A380 L FQF/G
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
6,26 :Lock the Flaps by wing tip brakes between Conf 0 and Conf 1 during extension
ffs3gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A340 COURSE
02.01 - INTRODUCTION
02-00CCQ.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.00 Page 2
A380 L FQE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.00
02-00CCQ.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.01 Page 1
A380 L FQE
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.01INTRODUCTION
01 - GENERAL
B. REGULATION REQUIREMENTS
They are listed in the following document :
- JAR-FCL - JAR-OPS
- FAR 121 - FAR 142
- FAA Advisory Circular : AC 120.53
- JAA / FAA / Transport Canada : Common Procedures Document
The differences between the base and the difference aircraft are published in the Operator
Difference Requirement (ODR) tables approved by FAA/JAA.
Airbus course is based on generic ODR tables published by the manufacturer.
C. PREREQUISITES
• Valid and current ATPL
• Qualified on the base aircraft
• Minimum of 3 months of operation on the base aircraft
• Minimum of 150 flight hours on the base aircraft
IMPORTANT :
Pilots entering this course must be highly knowledgeable on base aircraft systems.
02 - COURSE ORGANISATION
A. COURSE DESCRIPTION
a) General
The CCQ training is divided into four different phases:
- Ground phase
- Handling phase
- Skill test
- Base training or ZFTT
A welcome, which takes place before the starting of the course, includes the training
center presentation, all administrative issues and the distribution of all training supports
that will be used by the trainee.
The reference airport used during most of the sessions is a generic airport called Airbus
Training Airport.
b) Ground phase
CBT:
The aircraft systems study is progressively introduced during the first 8 days and is
carried out in a classroom.
02-01.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.01 Page 2
A380 L FQE
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
The acquired knowledge will be reinforced with the use of the Maintenance and Flight
Training Device (MFTD).
The CBT is not defined to cover aircraft differences only: however, part of some systems
is common to A320 and A380.
MFTD:
The MFTD is used to reinforce the systems knowledge acquired in the CBT and to study
the new SOP’s or major differences between the A320 and A380 (in normal and abnor-
mal operations).
Sessions are prepared by the trainee using the trainee’s booklet, FCOM, Flight Crew
Training Manual (FCTM) and Procedure Data Package (PDP).
Questions and answers are part of the session and will be addressed before or during
the session.
The PDP will be presented at the instructor discretion to either refresh the procedures
common to both aircraft or to introduce new procedures related to the A380.
OIS / Performance:
One full day is dedicated to Onboard Information System (OIS) presentation and to per-
formance computation using the different applications.
Cabin:
Doors and slides operations are conducted in a specific Cabin Trainer device.
Systems test:
At the end of the ground phase the acquired knowledge will be evaluated using an elec-
tronic test based on a randomized questionnaire.
c) Handling phase
This phase conducted in the FFS is mostly dedicated to aircraft handling in Normal and
Abnormal operations.
All the differences listed in the approved Operator Difference Requirement (ODR) tables
will be covered during this phase as well as some exercises common to both A320 and
A380.
d) Skill test
The skill test is defined according to the JAA requirements : for the time being, it is not a
skill test that only covers the differences.
02-01.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.01 Page 3
A380 L FQE
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
B. TRAINING DOCUMENTATION
-CFIT
DVD2
-REJECTED TAKE OFF
VIDEO BRIEFINGS
-UPSET RECOVERY
(To be given)
-COCKPIT DOORS
PAPER CONTENT
TRAINEE’S BOOKLET -RELEVANT CREW COURSE
(extract of FCTP: -BASE TRAINING SYLLABI
Flight Crew Training Program) -Set of 4 coloured cockpit panels
Extract of QRH
-SMOKE and EVACUATION procedures
(Quick Reference Handbook)
02-01.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.01 Page 4
A380 L FQE
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
C. INSTRUCTOR BRIEFINGS
D. CRITERIA OF PROFICIENCY
1) SYSTEMS
b. Unsatisfactory Examination :
Corrective action using the CBT will be determined by the instructor in coordination with
Airbus Training Director. The student will then undertake a CBT examination.
• When both “Satisfactory” and “May need extra training” boxes are ticked
----> comments are required, and the following session must be assessed as :
----> use the specific Progress Incident Report (PIR) (see Page 9) to list and comment
the trainee’s difficulties as well as the number of additional training sessions
requested.
It must be reported without delay to Airbus Director of Training.
Additional training sessions (see Page 10) have to be commented and use the
same identification as the session involved.
02-01.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.01 Page 5
A380 L FQE
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
E. CRITERIA OF PROFICIENCY
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
1) SYSTEMS / PERFORMANCE
UNSATISFACTORY
Instructor name
and signature
a. Evaluation during CBT Phase :
Code |____|____|____|
Code |____|____|____|
Code |____|____|____|
Code |____|____|____|
On completion of this phase, a written multiple choice examination will be completed.
sticker
Trainee
The minimum level required, to be declared proficient, is determined by the Airline, but
is never below 80%.
or
SATISFACTORY
b. Unsatisfactory Examination :
signature
Corrective action using the CBT will be determined by the instructor in coordination with
Trainee
Airbus Training Director. The student will then undertake a CBT examination.
• When both “Satisfactory” and “May need extra training” boxes are ticked
----> comments are required ( ), and the following session must be assessed as :
box is ticked
When “Unsatisfactory” box is ticked ( ):
----> use the specific Progress Incident Report (PIR) (see Page 7) to list and comment
* : - Comments are mandatory when May need extra training
the trainee’s difficulties as well as the number of additional training sessions
requested ( ).
- Write None if no specific comments are needed
Additional training sessions (see Page 8) have to be commented and use the
same identification as the session involved ( ).
Date
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
Sessions
MFTD A
MFTD 1
MFTD 2
MFTD 3
A380
02-01.fm
02-01.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE (L FQE)
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
HANDLING PHASE Trainee
A380 sticker
(Refer to relevant PIR when ticked) UNSATISFACTORY
A380
SATISFACTORY
Trainee Instructor name
Sessions Date Comments*
signature and signature
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
FFS 1
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
FFS 2
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
FFS 3
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
* : - Comments are mandatory when May need extra training box is ticked * *The following session MUST be assessed as SATISFACTORY or UNSATISFACTORY
- Write None if no specific comments are needed
Page 6
SATISFACTORY
Trainee Instructor name
Date (DD/MM/YYYY) Comments*
signature and signature
Scenario : ❐ 1 ❐2 All the items of the scenario have been performed as
(Please write the JAR references for UNSATISFACTORY items) defined in the FCTP
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
|____|____| / |____|____| /
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
SKTEST
Scenario : ❐ 1 ❐2 All the items of the scenario have been performed as
(Please write the JAR references for UNSATISFACTORY items) defined in the FCTP
|____|____| / |____|____| /
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
RE-SKTEST
INTRODUCTION
02.01 CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE
L FQE
* : - Comments are mandatory when May need extra training box is ticked * *The following session MUST be assessed as SATISFACTORY or UNSATISFACTORY
- Write None if no specific comments are needed
Page 7
02-01.fm
02-01.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE (L FQF/G)
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
BASE TRAINING Trainee
A380 sticker
|____|____|____|____|
BASE TRAINING
INTRODUCTION
02.01 CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE
L FQE
FFS |____|
|____|____|____|____| Code |____|____|____|
INTRODUCTION
02.01 CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE
L FQE
Page 9
02-01.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE (L FQE)
02-01.fm
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
ADDITIONAL TRAINING SESSIONS Trainee
A380 sticker
A380
UNSATISFACTORY
SATISFACTORY
Trainee s Instructor s name
Session* Date (DD/MM/YYYY) Comments
signature and signature
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
Code |____|____|____|
❐ Spare
|____|____| / |____|____| /
❐ Remedial
|____|____|____|____|
| FFS |____|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
Code |____|____|____|
❐ Spare
|____|____| / |____|____| /
❐ Remedial
|____|____|____|____|
INTRODUCTION
FFS |____|
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
Code |____|____|____|
❐ Spare
|____|____| / |____|____| /
❐ Remedial
|____|____|____|____|
02.01
|
FFS |____|
L FQE
Page 10
Note: If translator is required, CBT and SYSTEM TEST will be Projected CBT with instructor:
the ground school duration must be adapted.
02-02.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.02 Page 2
A380 L FQE
TRAINING FOOTPRINT
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.02
02-02.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 1
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
MFTD A (COCKPIT AND SYSTEMS PRESENTATION)
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ CALM 9999 13/12 1013
LFLL CALM 9999 10/8 1013 INIT TAKE OFF - LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
Co-route AIBLYS
ACTIVE / INIT
FLT NBR A/L ID 101 REFER TO SESSION GUIDE
385 t 65 t
GW FOB
847 000 Ib 143 000 Ib
320t
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 Ib
NOTES
RWY COND DRY FPLN : REFER CO ROUTE
AIR COND ON (SID ONZON 1N)
ANTI ICE OFF PAX NUMBER : 303
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 126 TOGA V1 125 TOGA
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftdA.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 2
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
mftdA.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE LFQE Page 2A
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• To demonstrate the use of the training device.
• To present a general view of the cockpit including flight instruments and major aircraft
systems controls and indications.
• To present the Less Paper Cockpit philosophy
mftdAgd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 2B
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
MFTD INITIALIZATION :
• The instructor completes the MFTD set up.
• INIT TAKE OFF at Airbus Airport
External power 2 and 3 : ON
APU running (APU Bleed ON)
Doors closed and slides armed
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
FMS loaded
SESSION GUIDE :
NOTE :
Do not explain Airbus aircraft systems but present the following according to the
trainee's aeronautical background by introducing the Airbus cockpit philosophy.
Remember that, at this stage, the trainee did not study all aircraft systems.
C. FMS :
MFD + KCCU : show only that KCCU is the unit to use for interaction on pages displayed on
MFD (Multi Function Display). Explain that KCCU doesn’t interact with ECAM only ECP can
do it.
D. OIS :
- Less paper cockpit philosophy
- FLT OPS STS
- FLT OPS Menu
• T.O. PERF
• LOAD SHEET
• LDG PERF
• IN-FLT PERF
• OPS LIBRARY
- Don’t explain all the applications: this will be done during the Performance course.
mftdAgd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE LFQE Page 2C
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
- EFIS
PFD : Flight parameters + memos (3 lines max) and limitations (8 lines max displaying
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
limitations that have a direct impact on A/C flight performances)
ND : Flight navigation information + vertical display zone
- ECAM
E/WD : engine primary parameters + bottom part :
- Normal C/L (requested by the flight crew via the ECP)
- Abnormal and emergency procedures (requested by the flight crew via the ECP)
- Alerts
- Limitations (left column : ALL PHASES / right column : APPR & LDG)
- Memos (left column : TO and LDG memos / right column : all other memos)
SD :
- Displays automatically the system page corresponding to 1 of the 12 flight phases.
- Explain flight phase inhibition
-
3 zones :
- System display page (with MORE info on WHEEL, FUEL, STS pages)
- Permanent data (TAT, SAT, ISA, time, GW, GWCG, FOB)
- ATC mailbox
ECP :
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Explain briefly hard keys functions
mftdAgd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 2D
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
- C/L completed indication: Color coding (blue when C/L not completed / grey when com-
pleted)
- C/L RESET indication
- STS indication
- C/L CLEAR bar
INIT FL 100
1. Explain alerts philosophy and procedure automatically displayed on ECAM
(sensed procedure)
• Alerts levels and priority rules : advisory then levels 1,2,3
• Failure types : independent, primary, secondary
• Color coding (red, amber, green, white, blue, magenta, grey)
2. Explain ABN PROC activated manually on ECAM by the crew (Not-Sensed procedures)
• Associated Alert Level
• Not activated : differences of color coding
• When activated, transferred into the ECAM and update of STS and limitations
Note : Explain that some failures are not detected by ECAM but directly on the interface itself
(eg : VHF failure displayed on RMP).
Insert the following failures in sequence without applying ECAM actions. The purpose is to
demonstrate alerts levels, priority rules, failures types and color coding.
mftdAgd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE LFQE Page 2E
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Restore all systems
Explain :
- Alert types (independent, primary, secondary)
- Items detected / not detected by ECAM (preceeded by a square to be ticked) : same color
coding as above. Explain that any action ticked inadvertently is reversible by unticking it
- Overflow arrow
- MORE indication on STS page. All the ECAM alerts which have an impact on the landing
performance are listed in the "ALERT IMPACTING LDG PERF" part of the MORE STS
PAGE.
The flight crew selects the applicable ECAM alert(s) in the OIS LDG PERF application to
compute LDG DIST and/or VAPP.
Point out that 3 indications may be displayed as applicable on the MORE page:
INOP SYS REDUND,
ALERTS IMPACTING LDG PERF,
CANCELLED CAUTION
- Deferred procedure (ALL PHASES, or APP & LDG) : appears in the C/L menu (amber
when not completed / white when completed).
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Explain FAILURE PENDING INDICATION
If an alert or ABN PROC is displayed but has not been cleared, a FAILURE PENDING mes-
sage appears on the E/WD, when the crew displays a C/L (ex : APPROACH)
When the C/L and the C/L menu are cleared, the alert or the not sensed ABN PROC reap-
pears on the E/WD and the message disappears.
mftdAgd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 2F
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
mftdAgd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 3
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
MFTD 1 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 270/10 9999 15/8 1010
LFLL 200/10 9999 18/12 1010 QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
VR FLEX 56 °C VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd1.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 4
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
MFTD 1 - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 270/10 9999 15/8 1010
QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
VR FLEX 56 °C VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd1.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 4A
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.0302.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Highlight the differences in terms of procedures through out all phases of flight in normal
operation
• Apply task sharing and communication
• Study and practice initialization of the FMS and review the various functions using the new
interface
• Present the new systems using ECAM pages
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW
Not applicable.
B. NEW EXERCICES / REFERENCES
Standard Flight profile - SOP’s
• FCOM/Procedures/Normal Procedures/Standard Operating Procedures
• FCOM/Procedures/Normal Procedures/Task Sharing
• FCTM/NORMAL OPERATIONS
• PDP : ALL PHASES Flow pattern
FMS: Initialization - New interfaces and functions
• FCOM/Procedures/Normal Procedures/Standard Operating Procedures/Cockpit
preparation/MFD FMS INITIALIZATION
• FCOM/Aircraft Systems/22 - AFS-Flight Management System/System description/Flight
Planning
Normal checklists
• FCOM/Procedures/Normal Procedures/Normal Checklists
Engine Start with External Pneumatic Power
• FCOM/Procedures/Supplementary Procedures/Engines/Unusual Starting Procedures
Use of RMP
• FCOM/Aircraft systems/23 - Communication/How to use the RMP/How to tune a frequency
FCU Backup
• FCOM/Aircraft systems/22 - AFS - Flight Guidance/Abnormal Operations/FCU Backup
C. SUPPORT
• Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCOM
• FCTM
* Note: In the FCTM look at procedures only and disregard the information related to handling-
characteristics
mftd1gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 4B
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
1 :Use the ECAM ELEC page to show the electrical supply using external power
and APU :
Highlight the priorities
- During cockpit preparation: highlight the differences in ECAM system pages
(Hydraulic, Fuel, Wheel)
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
- FMS preparation
- SURV page: check default settings
Highlight that compared to the A320 Radar, EGPWS, TCAS controls are grouped
on a single panel.
Show all the functions on the SURV CTL PNL and then call the MFD specific
page dedicated to SURV.
- INIT hard key: press
- STATUS: explain the page and don’t go to FMS P/N (Part Number)
- INIT: Do not explain all the REQUEST options
- IRS: Show the option to “ALIGN ON OTHER REF”
- DEPARTURE:
-Demonstrate the use of TMPY F-PLN
-F-PLN review according to the electronic F-PLN or to the charts
- NAVAIDS:
-Show TUNED FOR DISPLAY
-Show the TUNED FOR FMS NAV: how to deselect NAVAIDS
- FUEL § LOAD
- PERF:
-Show all the flight phases
- SEC INDEX:
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Note: During aircraft initialization, highlight the fact that messages are displayed in the
message pad at the bottom of the MFD: CLEAR INFO function is used to clear the
messages
5 :- Pitch trim: explain the pitch trim setting (PFD display and Pitch trim sw)
- Show the controls for Taxi cameras, Video on ECAM and OANS
mftd1gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 4C
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
8 :- During FMS exercises demonstrate the access to functions through the short cut
key and through the menu at each revised waypoint
- DIRECT TO: demonstrate the four accesses and highlight the differences in CRS
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
IN and OUT
- OFFSET: highlight the differences
- Different access to BRG/DIST TO
9 :- Descent preparation: use the predefined flow (ACTIVE, POSITION and SEC)
11 :- Highlight the fact that the deceleration rate is slower than on A320: Slats / Flaps
and Landing gear extension takes more time
- Explain the differences on the speed scale displayed on PFD (Flaps auto exten-
sion, short term managed speed)
The crew has already inserted the ZFW / ZFWCG / FOB figures (refer to syllabus) in
the FMS / FUEL&LOAD page
Explain that the FQMS computes the fuel distribution to ensure a CG target for take-
off of approximately 39,5% (SD page).
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Observe the TRIM TANK fuel quantity and note the value.
The FQMS normally receives (via the avionics system) approx every 10 min an
updated ZFWCG sent by the airline operations via DATALINK (the ground engineer
may also update it using the OMT (laptop located at the rear of the cockpit)), in order
to ensure proper fuel distribution (especially quantity in the trim tank) and final
GWCG target of 39,5%
The crew inserts the new figures in the FMS / ACTIVE / FUEL&LOAD page.
Observe that the current fuel distribution does not change. Therefore the FQMS
computes a new GWCG according to the updated ZFW / ZFWCG inserted by the
crew in the FMS.
The crew checks that the updated GWCG is within operational limits:
mftd1gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 4D
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
• If YES:
• If NO:
To demonstrate GWCG out of operational limits, the instructor inserts on the IOS
the new initial figures (make sure that the crew does not change the figures on
the FMS FUEL & LOAD page to allow the fuel to be redistributed):
ZFW= 320 T
ZFWCG= 32%
FOB= 83 T
Give the crew an updated LOADSHEET: The loading set up has changed:
New figures to be inserted by the crew in the FMS:
ZFW= 320 T
ZFWCG= 38%
Observe on the FUEL SD, the FWD transfer done by the FQMS to obtain a GWCG
of 39,5%. The FQMS will automatic stop the GND XFR when the GWCG 39,5% is
reached.
Due to time constraint (give a new slot for departure), stop the exercise as soon as
the GWCG has turned green or around 41% of GWCG. Explain that it should take
approx 17 min for the fuel to be transferred forward in the feed tanks, in this case.
The transfer rate is approx 600kg per min.
The crew should crosscheck on the OIS the FQMS computation obtained at the end
of the AUTO GND XFR. Crosscheck the TOCG (OIS) versus the GWCG (SD):
If the difference is within 1%, the CM1 signs the LOADSHEET.
If the difference is above 1%, investigate the causes.
22 :Demonstrate how to insert an ALT constraint using the menu at a revised waypoint
or inserting the constraint directly in the F/PLN
23 :Insert FCU 1 FAULT to get CAPT EFIS CTL PNL: demonstrate the use of FCU
backup: restore after demonstration
mftd1gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 4E
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
27 :Select the PERF page and explain the differences compared to the A320: different
phases of flight in go around
After the GA acceleration altitude:
- Explain that the FMS recovers prediction and vertical managed profile after the
acceleration altitude (CLB, ALT CRZ, DES are available during the missed
approach procedure).
- Explain that the CRZ FL is automatically updated and is the higher of:
• the value selected in the AFS - CP or
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
• the higher value of the FPLN (MAP + previous approach)
29 :Demonstrate how to activate (SWAP) a SEC F/PLN after a missed approach proce-
dure
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
mftd1gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 4F
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
mftd1gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 5
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
MFTD 2 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 360/10 9999 15/10 1010
LFLL 270/08 9999 14/10 1010 QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R /GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd2.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 6
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
MFTD 2 - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 360/10 2000 BKN 008 5/2 998
BIKF 200/05 9999 -10/-15 1000 QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd2.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 6A
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.0302.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Practice SOP’s using proper callouts and cross checks
• Highlight the differences in failure handling using the new ECAM procedures
• Study the Non Precision Approaches using the FLS function (if not retrofitted on A320)
• Study and practice new FMS functions
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW
• FMS initialization - New interfaces and functions
• SOP: Normal Operations - TASK Sharing
B. EXERCICES / REFERENCES
OIT: Use of Take-off performance and MEL applications·
• FCTM/NORMAL OPERATIONS/Flight Preparation/MEL
ENGINE START FAULT
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/70-Engines/ENG START FAULT
ECAM Procedures: new philosophy
• FCTM/OPERATIONAL PHILOSOPHY/ECAM
• PDP: ECAM PHILOSOPHY
CDS reconfiguration
• FCOM/Aircraft Systems/31-Indicating-Recording/CDS/Abnormal Operations
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/31-Indicating-Recording/CDS
FAULT
FUEL LEAK
• FCOM/Aircraft Systems/28-fuel/Abnormal Operations/Fuel leak Detection
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/28-Fuel/FUEL LEAK
DETECTED
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/70-Engines/ENG FUEL LEAK
BRAKES: system review
• FCOM/ Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/32-Landing Gear/BRAKES
FAULT
FMS: FMC FAULT
• FCOM/Aircraft Systems/22-AFS-Flight Management/Abnormal Operations/ FMC FAULT·
FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/22-Flight Management System/
AUTOFLT FMC FAULT and AUTO FLT FMS FAULT
Non Precision Approach using FLS
• FCOM/Procedures/Normal Procedures/Standard Operating Procedures/Non Precision
Approach
• FCTM/Normal Operations/Non Precision Approach
• PDP/Non Precision Approach
mftd2gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 6B
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
C. SUPPORT
• Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCOM
• FCTM
* Note: In the FCTM look at procedures only and disregard the information related to handling-
characteristics
mftd2gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 6C
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Then, perform a manual start on engine 1 with hot start to highlight the difference of
protections between AUTO and MAN. Restore and perform a quick start through IOS
panel.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Insert ELEC BAT 1 FAULT (level 2-Master Caution + SC)
Insert HYD G RSVR LEVEL LO (level 2-Master Caution + SC)
Insert ENGINE 1 FIRE (level 3-Master Warning + CRC)
Insert LEFT MAIN AVIONICS SMOKE (level 3 - Master Warning + CRC)
Restore
mftd2gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 6D
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
23 :- Insert a fuel leak (1000 kg/minute) - FUEL LEAK DETECTED is triggered: compare
Fuel at departure with fuel used + FOB and complete ECAM actions
1st scenario
- Leak is coming from the engine : after engine shut down, do not reset the failure but
insert 0 kg/min
2d scenario
- Leak is coming from the feed tank
- Do not play this scenario but explain the difference to the trainee
Restore
mftd2gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 6E
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
25 : - To accelerate the fuel jettison, use fuel tank distribution on the IOS and set XFR
and TRIM TKS to 0 in order to keep FEED TANKS FULL only. Stop at GW 420 t.
29 : Fail the G/S and brief the crew that he must deselect the G/S
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
31 :- Fail FMC B: Demonstrate that FMC C is taking over
- Fail FMC C : Demonstrate FMS SOURCE switching
Restore
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
mftd2gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 6F
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
mftd2gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 7
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
MFTD 3 - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 020/15 9999 -20/-21 1025
LFLL 010/15 9999 -20/-21 1025 QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd3.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 8
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
MFTD 3 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER Time EVENTS
LFZZ 020/15 9999 -20/-21 1025
LFLL 010/15 9999 -20/-21 1025 QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
mftd3.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 8A
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.0302.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE
• To highlight the differences in abnormal procedures using the new ECAM procedures
• To practice SOP’s using proper call outs and cross checks
• To review new FMS functions
02 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. REVIEW
• FMS initialization
• SOP: Normal operations
• ECAM procedures: new philosophy
• FCU Backup
B. EXERCISES / REFERENCES
ENGINE FAILURE
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/70-Engines/ENG FAIL
• PDP: ENGINE OUT AFTER TAKE-OFF
ENGINE RELIGHT
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/70-Engines/ENG RELIGHT IN
FLIGHT
G+Y SYS PRESS LO
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/29-Hydraulic/G+Y SYS PRESS
LO
• FCTM/Abnormal Operations/Hydraulic/G+Y Hydraulic Failures
• PDP: DUAL HYDRAULIC FAILURE
AIR COND SMOKE
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/26-Fire and Smoke Protection/
SMOKE-FUMES AVIONICS SMOKE
• FCTM/ABNORMAL OPERATIONS/Fire Protection/Smoke-Fumes
AVIONIC SMOKE
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/26-Fire and Smoke/L(R)
AVIONICS SMOKE
SLATS LOCKED
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/27-Slats-Flaps/ SLATS LOCKED
and SLATS FAULT
ENGINE TAIL PIPE FIRE
• FCOM/Procedures/Abnormal and Emergency Procedures/70-Engines/TAIL PIPE FIRE
mftd3gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 8B
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
C. SUPPORT
• Procedure data package (PDP)
• FCOM
• FCTM
* Note: in the FCTM look at procedures only and disregard information related to handling
characteristics
mftd3gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 8C
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
9,21 : - Trainee 2:
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
- Show the AFS CP Back up page and all the associated functions
- Demonstrate scroll wheel use and restore: flying demonstration will take place dur-
ing the second part of the session.
- Trainee 1:
- Insert FCU 1 + 2 fault to trigger CAPT AFS CP FAULT. Explain that CAPT and F/O
EFIS CP are also lost in this case.
- Keep the failure until the end of the missed approach
- Provide radar vectors to the crew in order to allow them to practice the use of FCU
back up
10 : - Cabin crew warns the flight crew that smoke is coming from the AIR COND outlets
in the Main and Upper cabin (specific smell: oil burnt)
- The instructor warns the crew that there is also smoke in the cockpit
- Flight crew applies SMOKE / FUMES ABN PROC if the visibility in the cockpit is
sufficient and ECAM is available or refer to the QRH.
- Stress communications between cabin crew and cockpit
- No change when PACK 1 is selected to OFF
- When PACK 2 is selected to OFF (after 2 minutes) insert ENGINE 3 - OIL PRESS
LO
- With PACK 2 OFF Cabin crew will advise the crew that smoke starts to disappear
from the Main and Upper cabin and the instructor informs the crew that smoke is
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
removed from the Cockpit
16,27: - FLS approach in cold weather conditions. Explain that the FLS profile takes into
account the temperature corrections (use of tutorial NPA flown with FLS function,
COLD WEATHER)
mftd3gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.03 Page 8D
A380 L FQE
GROUND PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
20 : - Insert a L MAIN AVNCS SMOKE and tell the crew that a little bit of smoke is coming
from Pedestal panel
- The crew will apply the ECAM procedure and then refer to QRH.
- Cancel the failure when GEN 3 and 4 have been selected to OFF and tell the crew
that the smoke disappears
- Explain the remaining of the procedure if the smoke was still present
26 :- During missed approach, insert a slats locked (by wing tip break) during slats
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
29 :- During engine shut down warn the crew that flames are coming out from the Engine
2. Show where to find the Tail pipe fire procedure (No differences from the A320).
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
mftd3gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 1
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 1 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 310/10 CAVOK 20/12 1010 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT INIT GATE A1 - LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
Co route AIBAIB
FLT NBR A/L ID 101
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
(AIRCRAFT NOT ELECTRICALLY SUPPLIED)
CPNY RTE AIBAIB
1 - COCKPIT PREPARATION
ALTN RTE AIBLYS 2 - ENGINE START
3 - AFTER START
CRZ FL FL 180 CRZ TEMP -20°C 4 - TAXI
5 - TAKE OFF v v
CI 90 TROPO 36090 v v v
6 - CLIMB FL 140
TRIP WIND HD 20 7 - AIRWORK v
8 - DESCENT v v v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD 9 - ILS APP - LFZZ 33R v v
1:30 10 - LANDING
385 t 65 t
GW FOB
847 000 Ib 143 000 Ib INIT HOLDING 1000 FT - LFZZ 33R -
GW 385 t
320 t
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 Ib 11 - FINAL APPROACHES v
2:00 12 - LANDINGS
NOTES
RWY COND DRY FPLN : Refer to Co-route
INIT HOLDING LFZZ 33R - GW 385t
AIR COND ON (SID MOU 1N) WIND 240/25
ANTI ICE OFF PAX NUMBER 450
13 - TAKE OFF - CROSSWIND v v
14 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272 15 - REJECTED LANDING v v
16 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF 2:15 17 - LANDING - CROSSWIND
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs1.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 2
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 1 - TRAINEE 2
TRK-FPA
WEATHER
Time EVENTS
ATHR
LFZZ 310/10 CAVOK 20/12 1010
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT 2:25
INIT HOLDING POINT - LFZZ 33R - GW 385t
Co route AIBAIB
FLT NBR A/L ID 101
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL 18 - TAXI
19 - TAKE-OFF v v
CPNY RTE AIBAIB 20 - CLIMB FL 140 v v v
ALTN RTE AIBLYS 21 - AIRWORK v
22 - DESCENT v v v
CRZ FL FL 180 CRZ TEMP -20°C 23 - ILS APP - LFZZ 33R v v
03:05 24 - LANDING
CI 90 TROPO 36090
HD 20 INIT APPROACH 1000 FT - LFZZ 33R
TRIP WIND
GW 385 t
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD
25 - FINAL APPROACHES v
385 t 65 t 03:35 26 - VISUAL PATTERN v
GW FOB
847 000 Ib 143 000 Ib
320 t INIT TAKE OFF LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 Ib WIND 240/25
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs1.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 2A
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.0302.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• To handle the A380 in normal, alternate and direct law using experience from the A320
• To practice SOP’s applicable to the A380
• To review specific changes in panels and controls during cockpit preparation
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW
• SOP’s - Task sharing
• FMS: initialization and use during all flight phases
• Use of OIS / LAPTOP for take-off performance computation
C. SUPPORT
• Briefing Guides
• Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCOM
• FCTM
ffs1gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 2B
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
ffs1gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 2C
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
- Oxygen masks
- Audio : hand mike, headset, RMP, ACP, PTT
- Use of taxi camera, airport navigation
- First FFS handling characteristics review (NWS, taxi, brake check, flight control
check, take off side stick position, rotation technique)
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
6,20 :Practice FMS during climb
- Place / Bearing / Distance
- Place - Bearing / Place - Bearing
- DIRECT TO on ND
ffs1gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 2D
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
ffs1gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 3
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 2 - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 270/15 6000 BKN 008 3/1 998 Time EVENTS
ATHR
BIKF 280/10 CAVOK -10 / -12 1007
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT GATE A1 - LFZZ 24 - GW 569 t
FLT NBR A/L ID 102 Co route AIBKEF
FROM LFZZ TO BIKF ALTN EINN
1 - COCKPIT PREPARATION
CPNY RTE AIBKEF 2 - ENGINE START
ALTN RTE KEFSNN 3 - AFTER START
4 - TAXI
CRZ FL FL 360 CRZ TEMP -58°C 00:45 5 - TAKE OFF (MTOW) v v
6 - CLIMB FL 100 v v v
CI 90 TROPO 37100 7 - RETURN TO DEPARTURE v v v
8 - ILS APP (RAW DATA) - LFZZ 33R v v
TRIP WIND HD 070
9 - GO AROUND -MISSED APP v v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD 10 - LOC APP (G/S INOP) - LFZZ 33R v v
11 - LANDING (OVERWEIGHT)
569 t 219 t 01:45 12 - 180° ON RUNWAY
GW FOB
1 232 000 Ib 462 000 Ib
INIT HOLDING POINT LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
350 t ZFW 320 t - FOB 65 t
ZFW ZFWCG 36 %
770 000 Ib 290/12 6000 BKN 012
Co route PAT 33R
NOTES
RWY COND WET FPLN : Refer to Co-route 13 - TAKE OFF - WINDSHEAR v v
AIR COND OFF DEP : ATC Clearance 14 - ADR 1 + 2 + 3 FAULT v
ANTI ICE ON PAX NUMBER : 500 15 - ILS APP - LFZZ 33R - DIRECT LAW v
02:10 16 - LANDING
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 24 / GW 569 t LFZZ 24 / GW 569 t
V1 v TOGA V1 v TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs2.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 4
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 2 - TRAINEE 1
TRK-FPA
WEATHER
EVENTS
ATHR
LFZZ 270/15 6000 BKN 008 3/1 998 Time
AP
FD
BIKF 280/15 CAVOK -10 / -12 1007
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs2.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 4A
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.0302.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
- To practice MTOW and overweight landing
- To practice rejected take-off
- To practice new functions specific to the A380: NPA approaches using FLS
- To practice Back Up Speed in Direct law
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW
• SOP’s - Task sharing
• Non Precision Approach using FLS
• Take-off and landing techniques
C. SUPPORT
• Briefing guides
• Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCTM
• FCOM
ffs2gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 4B
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
1 : Explain that the flight is planned with landing weight far above MLW for training pur-
pose (Take-off at MTOW consideration)
4,17 :Clearance for departure: RWY heading to 2000 ft - Right turn to intercept ATN 240°
radial inbound.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
On the OANS, demonstrate the use of FLAGS to identify the taxi clearance.
5,17 :New feature on PFD speed scale for Flaps auto retraction
14 : In downwind, when aircraft is cleaned up, set 3 ADR OFF for BUSS demonstration
Weather : CAVOK
26 : In downwind, when aircraft is cleaned up, set ADR 2 + 3 OFF. Then, 1 minute later,
insert CAPT L+R PITOT BLOCKED
Weather : CAVOK
Note:
Circling approaches will be performed under specific airline requirement (if approved by the
local Authority): in this case an additional 30 minutes will be required to complete the
session.
ffs2gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 5
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 3 - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 350/10 8000 OVC 008 15/12 1002 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT INIT HOLDING POINT - LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
Engines running - NIGHT VISUAL
FLT NBR A/L ID 103
Co route PAT 33R
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL
1 - TAXI
CPNY RTE PAT 33R
2 - TAKE OFF - ENGINE FAILURE v v
ALTN RTE AIB LYS 3 - RADAR VECTORS v v v
4 - ILS APP - LFZZ 33R v v
CRZ FL 4000 ft CRZ TEMP +8°C 00:45 5 - LANDING - ONE ENG OUT
CI 90 TROPO 36090
INIT TAKE OFF LFZZ 24 - GW 500 t
TRIP WIND N/A ZFW 350 t - FOB 150 t - DAY VISUAL
330/10
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD SID MOU 1W
ffs3.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 6
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 3 - TRAINEE 1
TRK-FPA
WEATHER
Time EVENTS
ATHR
LFZZ 350/10 8000 OVC 008 15/12 1002
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT 2:05 INIT HOLDING POINT - LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
Co route PAT 33R - NIGHT VISUAL
FLT NBR A/L ID 103
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL 16 - TAKE OFF - ENGINE FAILURE v v
17 - CLIMB 4000 ft v v v
CPNY RTE PAT 33R 18 - ILS APP - LFZZ 33R - ONE ENG OUT v v
ALTN RTE AIB LYS 19 - LANDING
CRZ FL 4000 ft CRZ TEMP +10°C INIT TAKE OFF LFZZ 24 - GW 500 t
ZFW 350 t - FOB 150 t - DAY VISUAL
CI 90 TROPO 36090 330/10
SID MOU 1W
TRIP WIND -
ffs3.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 6A
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.0302.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE
• To practice the engine failure on A380 highlighting the fact that the procedure is similar
• To practice approach and landing with two engines inoperative on the same wing
• To practice the on ground emergency evacuation
02 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. REVIEW
• SOP’s - Task sharing
• Non Precision Approach using FLS
• Rejected Take-off
C. SUPPORT
• Briefing guides
• Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCTM
• FCOM
ffs3gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 6B
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
armed)
Note:
The session allows extra time and some exercises can be repeated at instructor / trainee
discretion.
ffs3gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 7
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 4 - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 300/10 8000 OVC 010 20/16 1010 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT INIT GATE A1 - LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
Co route PAT 33R
FLT NBR A/L ID 104
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL 1 - COCKPIT PREPARATION
2 - ENGINE START
CPNY RTE PAT 33R
3 - AFTER START
ALTN RTE AIBLYS 4 - TAXI
5 - TAKE OFF v v
CRZ FL 4000 ft CRZ TEMP +8°C 6 - CLIMB TO 4000 ft v v v
7 - FLAPS SYS 1 + 2 FAULT v v v
CI 90 TROPO 36900
8 - VOR - DME APP (FLS) - LFZZ 33R v v v v
TRIP WIND N/A 1:15 9 - LANDING - NO FLAPS
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD INIT HOLDING POINT - LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
CAVOK - 060/20
385 t 65 t
GW FOB
847 000 Ib 143 000 Ib 10 - TAKE OFF - CROSSWIND v v
11 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
320 t 1:30 12 - LANDING - CROSSWIND
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 Ib
INIT HOLDING POINT - LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
NOTES
300/15 OVC 008
RWY COND DRY DEP : N/A Co route AIBAIB 1 - SID MOU 1N
AIR COND ON (SID 1B)
ANTI ICE OFF PAX NUMBER : N/A 13 - TAKE OFF v v
14 - CLIMB FL 80 v v v
15 - ALL GENERATORS FAULT v
E
16 - DESCENT v
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
17 - ILS APP (RAW DATA) - LFZZ 33R v
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF 2:05 18 - LANDING
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs4.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 8
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 4 - TRAINEE 2
TRK-FPA
WEATHER
Time EVENTS
ATHR
LFZZ 300/10 8000 OVC 010 20/16 1010
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
2:15 INIT HOLDING POINT LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t -
FLT NBR A/L ID 104 Co route PAT 33R
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL
19 - TAKE OFF v v
CPNY RTE PAT 33R 20 - CLIMB TO 4000 FT v v v
ALTN RTE AIBLYS 21 - FLAPS LOCKED (WING TIP BRAKES) v v v
22 - NDB APP (FLS) - LFZZ 33R v v v v
CRZ FL 4000 ft CRZ TEMP +8°C 2:40 23 - LANDING - NO FLAPS
ffs4.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 8E
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.0302.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE
• To operate the aircraft in normal and abnormal situations according to SOP’s
• To practice no flaps approach and landing
• To practice emergency electrical configuration including approach and landing in direct law
02 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. REVIEW
• SOP’s - Task sharing
• Non Precision Approach using FLS
• Rejected Take-off
C. SUPPORT
• Briefing guides
• Procedure Data Package (PDP)
• FCTM
• FCOM
ffs4gd.fm
CCQ A320 TO A380 COURSE 02.04 Page 8F
A380 L FQE
HANDLING PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
IF 2 CAPT :
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
35 :- Runway 06
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
ffs4gd.fm
SKILL TEST SYLLABI
02.07.01 - INTRODUCTION
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
- SCENARIO 2........................................................................ Page 2
• TRAINEE 1 - EDDF / LSZH
• TRAINEE 2 - LSZH / LFBO
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
02-07-00.fm
SKILL TEST SYLLABI 02.07.00 Page 2
A380
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.07.00
02-07-00.fm
SKILL TEST SYLLABI 02.07.01 Page 1
A380
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.07.01INTRODUCTION
01 - INTRODUCTION
The Skill test is conducted at the end of the training session(s).
The Skill test session must be conducted by an Authorized examiner and the content of the
session must be approved by the relevant Authority.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
(For Skill tests conducted in the AIRBUS TRTO, refer to guidelines published on Airbus
People intranet)
02 - SESSION OBJECTIVE
Assessment of the ability to operate the aircraft in normal, abnormal and emergency
operations to standard in accordance with SOPs and meeting the relevant standards of
accuracy.
03 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. GENERAL
• A skill test scenario consists in series of exercises in a simulated commercial air trans-
port environment.
• A skill test scenario starts as a line oriented flight in which, some specific events have
been inserted. Depending upon crew decision, these events may lead either to a diver-
sion or a continuation to destination. This will enable to check the candidate making deci-
sions appropriate to the operational situation. The skill test continues with additional
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
items which complete the minimum required per trainee by the JAR-FCL.
• Each scenario fulfils the requirement of JAR-FCL (Arrêté du 29 Mars 1999) with the
arrangements indicated in "DGAC Instruction 10852"
• The FCL item 3.9.3.1 ILS APROACH RAW DATA may be an ILS approach down to a
DH of 200 ft manually flown without FD but with VV (BIRD).
B. FLIGHT PREPARATION
Prior to starting the briefing, the crew receives the session documents (files available in the
“INST SUP FLIGHT” menu on Airbus People server) : computerised FPLN, loadsheet, the
list of airport forecast and NOTAMs.
The fuel quantity to be boarded is decided by the trainees.
The crew will be given a slot for departure in order to avoid too long preparations. The
Examiner will check the ability of the candidate to plan the flight from this material.
02-07-01.fm
SKILL TEST SYLLABI 02.07.01 Page 2
A380
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
- In the Simulator
• Follow the approved scenario. If the simulator does not perform properly, call
maintenance and interrupt the session
• Ensure that the test is completed efficiently and without wasted time
• Exercice sound judgement and be impartial throughout. To assist with this, each
examiner should maintain a record of the test/check so that all aspects may be
debriefed comprehensively
- Debriefing
• Conduct a fair and unbiased debriefing based on identifiable factual items
• 02.07.0
D. SUGGESTED BRIEFING
The candidates are briefed by the Examiner as suggested :
• "The skill test comprises 2 main parts. It starts as a line oriented flight in which some spe-
cific events have been inserted. Follow the departure clearance and deal with any prob-
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
lems or emergencies as they occur using the procedures and techniques learnt during
the training course. Take all appropriate decisions .
• You should use Airbus standard procedures or your own company procedures, if differ-
ent.
• You are responsible for liaison with ATC, safe operation and navigation of the aircraft.
Make sure that you correctly understand ATC instructions.
• The second part comprises the remaining items in order to meet the Authorities require-
ments. It will be necessary for me to initialize the simulator in order to carry out the exer-
cises. I will keep you advised when I have control of the simulator and when I return
control to you.
• You may communicate to each other in your mother language to facilitate procedures,
but keep me informed about what you are doing and remember you must speak English
to ATC.
• Treat this session as if it was a normal commercial flight. Do not waste time but do not
allow yourselves to be rushed. You must tell ATC what you require.
• Make good use of the published documentation for en-route and terminal areas. Set and
observe the appropriate minima.
02-07-01.fm
SKILL TEST SYLLABI 02.07.01 Page 3
A380
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
• Use headsets. Consider me as ATC, ground engineer and cabin crew.
• The weather or aircraft parameters might vary for some sequences. I will advise you of
the changes.
• For departure, use the data given on the provided forms."
04 - PROFICIENCY CRITERIA
The candidate shall demonstrate its ability to :
• perform normal and abnormal procedures according to SOP.
• perform manoeuvres required with smoothness, using the correct procedures and
techniques, according to the standard of accuracy required by regulations.
• understand and apply crew co-ordination,
• communicate effectively with the other crew member
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
- Precision approach............................................................................ half scale deflection,
azimuth and glide path
- Heading
• all engines operating ...................................................................... +/- 5°
• with simulated engine failure .......................................................... +/- 10°
- Speed
• all engines operating ...................................................................... +/- 5 knots
• with simulated engine failure........................................................... + 10 knots/ -5 knots
Further training may be required after a failed test/check. Failure to achieve a valid pass in all
sections in two attempts shall require further training as determined by the examiner. There is
no limit to the number of skill tests/proficiency checks that may be attempted.
02-07-01.fm
SKILL TEST SYLLABI 02.07.01 Page 4
A380
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
nature. Such repeats must be indicated on training records, they are not entered on the
LPC/LST MPA form.
The Examiner may stop the test/check at any stage if it is considered that the applicant's
competency requires a complete re-test/re-check.
05 - SESSION GUIDE
Refer to scenarii on the the “INST SUP FLIGHT” on the server.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
02-07-01.fm
SKILL TEST SYLLABI 02.07.02 Page 1
A380
STANDARD, ADAPTED AND CCQ
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TYPE RATING COURSES Issue 03 NOV 2007
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
00:55 9 - CLIMB v v v
01:10 3.4.5 10 - CRUISE - YELLOW HYD LO PRESS v v v
01:20 3.6.9 11 - DESCENT - TCAS EVENT v
3.9.1 12 - STAR v v v
01:30 3.9.4 13 - NON PRECISION APPROACH (FLS) v v v v
01:35 5.1 14 - LANDING - Restore v v
INIT T/O
01:45 2.5.2 15 - TAKE-OFF - ENGINE 1 FAILURE between V1 and V2 v v
02:00 16 - RADAR VECTORS v v
3.9.3.4/
v v
3.9.3.1 17 - ILS APPROACH 1 ENGINE OUT
02:05 4.3 18 - GO AROUND 1 ENGINE OUT v v
19 - DOWNWIND ENGINE 2 FIRE - AP AVAILABLE v v v
3.6.8 20 - PROCEDURE 2 ENGINES OUT v v v
21 - ILS APPROACH 2 ENGINES OUT v v v
02:25 5.6 22 - LANDING 2 ENGINE OUT - Restore v v
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
INIT HOLDING
1.4 26 - AFTER ENGINE START
1.5 27 - TAXI OUT
1.6 28 - BEFORE TAKE-OFF CHECKS
02:45 2.5.2 29 - TAKE OFF - ENGINE 4 FAILURE between V1 and V2 v v
3.4.4/3.9.1 30 - SID - RADAR VECTORS - GEN X FAULT v v v v
3.9.3.1/ 31 - ILS APPROACH 1 ENGINE OUT
3.9.3.4
v v
03:05 4.3 32
- - GO AROUND 1 ENGINE OUT v v
3.4.0 33
- - RADAR VECTORS - RESTORE AP - ENGINE 3 OIL LOW PRES. v v v
3.6.8 34
- - PROCEDURE 2 ENGINES OUT v v v
35 - ILS APPROACH 2 ENGINES OUT v v v
03:25 5.6 36 - LANDING 2 ENGINE OUT - RESTORE v v
INIT T/O
2.2 37 - TAKE OFF v v
38 - RADAR VECTORS v v v v
3.9.4 39 - NON PRECISION APPROACH (FLS) v v v v
03:45 5.1 40 - LANDING v v
TRtest.fm
SKILL TEST SYLLABI 02.07.02 Page 2
A380
STANDARD, ADAPTED AND CCQ
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TYPE RATING COURSES Issue 03 NOV 2007
INIT T/O
01:35 2.5.2 15 - TAKE-OFF - ENGINE 1 FAILURE between V1 and V2 v v
01:50 16 - RADAR VECTORS v v
3.9.3.4/ 17 - ILS APPROACH 1 ENGINE OUT
3.9.3.1
v v
01:55 4.3 18 - GO AROUND 1 ENGINE OUT v v
19 - DOWNWIND ENGINE 2 FIRE - AP AVAILABLE v v v
3.6.8 20 - PROCEDURE 2 ENGINES OUT v v v
21 - ILS APPROACH 2 ENGINES OUT v v v
02:15 5.6 22 - LANDING 2 ENGINE OUT - Restore v v
INIT HOLDING
1.4 26 - AFTER ENGINE START
1.5 27 - TAXI OUT
1.6 28 - BEFORE TAKE-OFF CHECKS
02:35 2.5.2 29 - TAKE OFF - ENGINE 4 FAILURE between V1 and V2 v v
3.4.11/ 30 - SID - RADAR VECTORS - PNF DU CDS UNIT FAULT
3.9.1 v v
3.9.3.1/ 31 - ILS APPROACH 1 ENGINE OUT
3.9.3.4
v v
02:55 4.3 32
- - GO AROUND 1 ENGINE OUT v v
3.4.0 33
- - RADAR VECTORS - RESTORE AP - ENGINE 3 OIL LOW PRES. v v v
3.6.8 34
- - PROCEDURE 2 ENGINES OUT v v v
35
- - ILS APPROACH 2 ENGINES OUT v v v
03:15 5.6 36 - LANDING 2 ENGINE OUT - RESTORE v v
INIT T/O
2.2 37 - TAKE OFF v v
38 - RADAR VECTORS v v v v
3.9.4 39 - NON PRECISION APPROACH (FLS) v v v v
03:35 5.1 40 - LANDING v v
TRtest.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI
02.08.00 -
02-08-00.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI 02.08.00 Page 2
A380
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.08.00
02-08-00.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI 02.08.01 Page 1
A380
AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.08.01AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING
01 - TRAINING OBJECTIVE
In order to reply to questions raised by Airbus Operators concerning the use of ground
spoilers during Base Training and to harmonize the procedure, the following would be recom-
mended :
Aircraft base training objective is intended to confirm the "transfer of knowledge" from the FFS
to the aircraft.
Additionally it gives the trainee the opportunity to experience for the first time the real
aircraft behavior in basic manoeuvers such as landing, flare, derotation, etc..
Therefore, we do recommend to arm the spoilers during landing exercises in Base Training.
Nevertheless should any operator wish to continue with the old procedure, we have no objec-
tion to do so.
This procedure extensively tested by the Flight Test Division and the Training Division (in
addition to those done by Airlines) proved to be very realistic from the point of view of aircraft
behavior and has no safety related impact.
The detailed procedure is explained in item “e. Touch and Go”.
To summarise, upon landing, at nose wheel touch down, the TRI will disarm the spoilers by
pushing on the speedbrake lever to initiate the retraction sooner.
Disarming the spoilers will also display the pitch trim on the PFD.
The purpose of this procedure instead of waiting for the automatic retraction while advancing
the thrust levers is due to the physical position of the thrust levers. Depending on the Fly-By-
Wire aircraft, the automatic retraction will start between a TLA ranging from 20° up to 35°,
which is well above the setting for spool up of the engines.
Trainees should read the briefing to understand the content and requirements of the session.
A full briefing will be given by the TRI prior to the flight.
NOTE : when transitioning from another Fly-By-Wire aircraft, following points will be
highlighted during the base training briefing :
• overall cockpit layout
• rotation, pitch attitude target
02 - SCHEDULE
Pre flight briefing duration = 1:00
The TRI will ensure that the trainee has reviewed the walkaround 3D.
03 - GENERAL
Training flights must be conducted in accordance with Airbus training regulations. Training
flights at Toulouse or nearby airports will be conducted under the direct authority of the Airbus
Training Director. In the above case the AI/ST Operations Department will be responsible for
the organisation, documentation and coordination of the flight training. Flight training away
from Toulouse will be undertaken under the joint authority of the AI/ST Team leader and the
Chief Pilot of the customer Airline, using the operational resources of that Airline. Where such
training is undertaken, Flight Instructors will observe the Airbus rules regarding the conduct of
the Flight Training.
01BFGflight.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI 02.08.01 Page 2
A380
AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.08.01
05 - CARRIAGE OF PASSENGERS
The carriage of passengers is limited to technical observers from Airbus or the customer Air-
line, ATC controllers and other specifically approved by the Airbus Training Director or his
Deputy, and with the agreement of the instructor. The number of passengers may not exceed
two. If the aircraft is under customer foreign registry, approval must also be obtained from the
Airline's Representative. Passengers' names will be provided to Airbus Training Operations
for inclusion in the flight program.
A. SEATING POLICY
Trainees will occupy their respective operating seats under the supervision of their
instructor until cockpit preparation is complete. The instructor will then occupy the
appropriate non-flying pilot's seat. Normally, Captain trainees will occupy the left seat, First
Officer trainees the right seat. However, if a First Officer is being type-rated and the
licensing authorities require it, the First Officer trainee will be trained in the left seat. The
observers' seat will be occupied by the non-flying trainee Pilot.
a. Unauthorized Manoeuvres
NO unauthorized manoeuvre which might jeopardize the safety of flight will be allowed.
In addition, NO demonstrations of the flight envelope protection systems will be inten-
tionally carried out unless expressly authorized by the Airbus Training Director or his
Deputy.
01BFGflight.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI 02.08.01 Page 3
A380
AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.08.01
c. Check-lists
Full check-lists will be performed. The ECAM landing memo may then be used at
instructor discretion to replace full check-lists.
d. Accelerate / Stop
No acceleration / stop training will be conducted in the aircraft. The decision to reject a
take-off during a Base Training flight is made exclusively by the instructor who will
immediately take over control of the aircraft. A briefing in this regard will be made prior
to flight and reinforced during the take-off briefing.
e. Touch and Go
Touch and go are used to reduce the amount of training time wasted in taxying the air-
craft back to the holding point and awaiting take-off clearance. In order to maintain a
high level of safety they must be conducted in a properly disciplined manner.
The following technique is to be used :
Prior to EVERY touch and go, the instructor will confirm with the trainee that :
- reverse thrust will not be used
- brakes (auto or manual) will not be used
The trainee will : - land the nosewheel after main gear touchdown
- track the runway centreline using rudder pedal inputs only
The trainee will : - advance the thrust levers approximately 2" (5 cm) forward
(to prevent engines reducing to ground idle)
The instructor will : - move flap handle to position 3 and confirm the flaps are running
- reset the rudder trim if necessary
- monitor the forward movement of the pitch trim on the PFD
- place one hand behind the thrust levers ensuring they are advanced
approximately 2" (5 cm)
- call “GO” when aircraft is in the correct configuration (flaps 3 and pitch
trim in the green band).
01BFGflight.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI 02.08.01 Page 4
A380
AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
The trainee will :- advance the thrust levers to the TOGA detent
- maintain the runway centreline.
The trainee will : - rotate the aircraft to the pitch attitude commanded by the SRS or 12.5°if no
FD is available.
Note: Aircraft will be safe to fly if the pitch trim is within the green band of the display. However,
the optimum take-off handling characteristic will be obtained with the pitch trim in the magenta
band sector of the display.
01BFGflight.fm
02.08.01
•FD OFF F1
•TRK/FPA ON
F2
After main landing gear touch down
06 - CONDUCT OF TRAINING FLIGHTS (CONT’D)
TRAINEE INSRUCTOR
•Land nose wheel
•Disarm spoilers
500 ft/AAL •Call ’’stand up’’
F3 •Thrust levers 2’’ forward
•Track centerline
•Set flaps 3
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI
01BFGflight.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI 02.08.01 Page 6
A380
AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
02.08.01
• Following gear retraction the instructor will call for CLB thrust.
• The trainee will move the thrust levers to the CLB detent
(the FMA will read THR CLB | SRS | GA TRK).
At acceleration altitude or ALT*, whichever occurs first, and F speed : select FLAP 1 and
S speed. Approach may be activated at this stage.
Emergencies :
If the instructor wishes to abandon the touch and go he will call "STOP"
simultaneously taking control of the aircraft and bring it to a halt using maximum
braking and reverse. Once the aircraft has stopped he will call for any appropriate
ECAM actions. The decision to discontinue a touch and go after the application of
TOGA must only be taken if the instructor is certain that the aircraft cannot safely fly.
Remember there is no V1 on a touch and go. Note that the take-off configuration warn-
ing may sound if the application of TOGA is made while the flaps or pitch trim are
resetting but still outside of the take-off range.
01BFGflight.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI 02.08.01 Page 7
A380
AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.08.01
g. Next Exercise
The instructor will inform the trainee of the next exercise to be performed during the
downwind leg, and he will confirm the trainees' understanding of this exercise. During
each approach, the instructor will remind the trainee whether a full stop, a touch and go,
or a go around will be performed.
h. Instructor Take-over
1. In Flight :
On the A380 there is no intermediate step for corrections between voice recommen-
dations (oral guidance) and total take-over by pressing the push-button on the sides-
tick. Because of the nature of the "fly by wire" system, additive control inputs by the
instructor may be of negative value for instruction purposes and can generate confu-
sion in the handling of the trajectory. This should be emphasized and reviewed with
the trainees during the preflight briefing. If take over becomes necessary during the
flight, the instructor will clearly call "I HAVE CONTROL" and press sidestick priority
pushbutton. The trainee will acknowledge by calling "YOU HAVE CONTROL",
release the sidestick and observe the red arrow on the sidestick priority panel on the
glareshield. Instructor will keep his side priority pushbutton depressed until the air-
craft is under full control and it is safe to return control to the trainee. However there
may be cases where it is necessary to apply back stick without warning in case of a
very late flare. It must be emphasized that a take over is a very rare occurence and
that if a take over is necessary the trainee should not regard this as a negative devel-
opment but the normal take over method for an A380.
2. On Ground :
It should be emphasized that the nosewheel steering tiller should NOT be used at
high speeds (GS > 30 kt) because of overcontrolling. Steering inputs from both tillers
are additive, and corrective inputs by the instructor can be confusing and potentially
dangerous. Should a take over be necessary, the instructor will immediately call out "I
HAVE CONTROL", and if necessary, be prepared to use differential braking to regain
control or bring the aircraft to a stop.
i. Fuel Management
For normal flight training sessions, the normal fuel load should be such that the first
landing would be performed at approximatly Max LW - 10 tonnes.
(Average consumption: - 13 tonnes / hour).
01BFGflight.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI 02.08.01 Page 8
A380
AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM- Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.08.01
j. Automatic Landings
For demonstration purposes, instructors may carry out automatic landings provided the
weather and the ILS meet CAT 1 criteria or better. The instructor should be prepared to
take manual control immediately if the flight path or roll out deviate. Trainees should be
reminded of all the conditions and limitations required prior to conducting an automatic
landing during low visibility procedure.
NOTE : See FCOM references for limitations on the use of the automatic landing
system.
k. FMS Use
The FMS should be initialised for the intended flight either by data base company route
or by waypoint and PBD. Managed lateral navigation may be used to intercept the first
ILS assisted approach and when weather makes visual flight impossible. All visual cir-
cuits should be flown with FD off and TRK/FPA selected. The fact that the approach and
runway will remain displayed is of considerable assistance for positioning the aircraft on
final approach.
m. Taxi
Little if any power above idle thrust will be required to get the aircraft moving at
training weights. Thrust should be used symmetrically. Avoid high thrust settings at low
ground speeds due to the risk of ingestion (FOD). Avoid placing engines over unconsol-
idated or unprepared ground e.g. over the edge of taxiways. Brakes may be checked
once the aircraft is moving and thereafter the normal maximum taxi speed should be 30
kt in a straight line, 8 kt for a sharp turn. Due to the position of the flight deck, in between
the upper and the lower cabin deck, the pilot eye height of 24ft will be different from
many other aircraft. PFD when using ETALS Monitor ND ground speed displays to help
assess the taxi speed. Do not "ride" the brakes, as 30 kt is exceeded, apply brakes
smoothly and decelerate to 10 kt, release the brakes and allow the aircraft to accelerate
again.
NOTE : Use of engine anti-ice increases ground idle thrust, care must be taken on
slippery surfaces. Nosewheel steering is also fly by wire. The inputs of the
nosewheel steering tillers are additive (just like the sidestick).
Care is needed to steer the aircraft smoothly with small tiller inputs.
Sharp turns particularly need care as the rate of response of the nosewheel
to tiller input is not linear.
01BFGflight.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI 02.08.01 Page 9
A380
AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.08.01
n. Take-off
For crosswind take-off, routine use of into-wind aileron is not recommended. In strong
crosswind conditions, small amounts of lateral control may be used to maintain wings
level, but the pilot should avoid using excessive amounts. This causes excessive spoiler
deployement, which increases the aircraft tendency to turn into wind. A two stage power
application to TOGA or FLEX is made and the aircraft is kept straight by use of the rud-
der. At 100kt the connection between the nosewheel steering and the rudder pedals is
progressively reduced from 6° to reach 2° at 150kt.
At VR, use a constant pitch rate of about 3°/sec and rotate to a typical all-engine attitude
of about 12.5°.
• If some lateral control has been applied on the ground, center the side stick during
rotation so that the aircraft gets airborne with a zero roll rate demand.
• After lift off, follow the SRS pitch command bar.
• If one engine has failed, at VR, rotate the aircraft smoothly, using a continuous pitch
rate to an initial pitch attitude of 10°.
o. Initial Climb
Having confirmed a positive rate of climb, the gear is retracted and the aircraft climbs
away following the FD commands. Care should be taken to restrict control inputs to
those necessary to change or correct the flight path only i.e. avoid overcontrolling.
At thrust Reduction Altitude "CLB" will flash on the upper left portion (ATHR) of the PFD.
Move the thrust levers to the CLB detent (two "clicks" from TOGA or one "click" from
FLEX).
The autothrust is now active. At acceleration altitude or ALT*, whichever occurs first,
and F speed : select FLAP 1 and S speed. Approach may be activated at this stage.
01BFGflight.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI 02.08.01 Page 10
A380
AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.08.01
p. Circuit Handling
Remember that in pitch the sidestick is demanding "g load" and that in roll it is demand-
ing roll rate. All visual circuits MUST be flown with FD off and TRK/FPA selected, bank
angle should be limited to 30°. It is usual to switch FD off at the begining of the down-
wind leg. Use of managed speed is normal procedure as well as use of autothrust. The
standard timing of 3 sec per 100 ft above AAL and corrected for wind by
1 sec per 1 kt may be used from abeam the end of the runway prior to turning base leg.
Turning base leg (end of timing), select F2, gear down and arm spoilers.
The most useful PFD display is the VV symbol to assist in setting the aircraft up on the
correct downwind, approach path, to maintain altitude and to avoid gross errors.
NOTE : With FD off, the speed target remains magenta VAPP target since approach
phase is activated.
01BFGflight.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI 02.08.01 Page 11
A380
AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.08.01
1. Standard Landings :
The pilot's view from the cockpit during approach and landing is particularly good.
The cockpit cut off angle is 19° which gives a superb view of the runway close to the
aircraft. Students must make sure that they look well ahead during the flare and land-
ing to enhance their ability to judge the position of the aircraft relative to the ground.
Commence a gentle progressive flare at around 40 ft and allow the aircraft to touch
down without a prolonged floating flare. At 20 ft "Retard" will be called. Reduce the
thrust levers promptly to idle. Do not attempt to "hold the aircraft off" as considerable
float may be followed by a hard touchdown.
2. Crosswind Landings :
Either the "forward slip" or the "decrab" technique may be used. The preferred tech-
nique is the decrab method ; allow the aircraft to point into wind, pushing it straight
with gentle use of rudder during the flare. If the decrab is gentle, little use of into wind
aileron will be required if any. For rapid decrab using large or fast rudder inputs, the
aircraft will roll conventionally and aileron sidestick inputs will be required.
REMEMBER the sidestick demands roll rate, once the wings are level centre the
sidestick.
3. Caution
Avoid flaring high and prolonged "hold offs". Tailstrike will occur if the pitch attitude
exceeds the value given 11.5° gear compressed and 13.5° gear not compressed.
01BFGflight.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI 02.08.01 Page 12
A380
AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.08.01
07 - DOCUMENTATION
The following documentation will be provided, as appropriate, prior to the commencement of
the flight. In particular, the weather folder, notams, ATC flight plan, overflight clearances and
computerized flight plan (where necessary), will be provided by AI/ST Operations by the time
the crew report for briefing
b. Training Documentation
- Weight and balance report * - AI/ST-T flight LOG and briefing book
- Charts documentation* - Airbus maintenance LOG
- Notams * / Weather folder * - Flight syllabus
- Take-off data cards (if needed)
e. Personal Documents
01BFGflight.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI 02.08.01 Page 13
A380
AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.08.01
07 - DOCUMENTATION (END)
b. Training Documentation
e. Personal Documents
NOTES :
• Items marked * are under Airbus Training OPS responsiblity, but if any document is
missing contact Airbus Training OPS who will coordinate with the appropriate Office.
• AIRBUS FLIGHT LOG must be filled in at AI/EV - OPS after the flight.
01BFGflight.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI 02.08.01 Page 14
A380
AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
01BFGflight.fm
02.08.02STANDARD, ADAPTED AND
Right Xwind 15 kt
Day Dry Gust 25 kt with windshear alert TOW = MLW CM1 CM2
Turbulence 25%
14 - TAKE-OFF
15 - VISUAL CIRCUIT - NON ILS ASSISTED OFF
16 - LANDING IN CONFIG 3
02FFSZFTT.fm
02.08.02
02FFSZFTT.fm
02.08.02
01 - GENERAL
ZERO FLIGHT TIME Base Training is proposed to customers having a prior agreement on
this subject with their respective regulatory authority.
02 - PREREQUISITES
The Airbus Training Policy regarding the ZFTT is compliant with the JAR-FCL 1 Subpart F,
Appendix 1 to JAR-FCL 1.261 (c) (2).
A. PILOT EXPERIENCE
In addition to the standard Airbus prerequisites, ZFTT shall only apply to candidates of
multi-pilot aeroplanes having more than :
• 500 hours flight time or 100 routes sectors on a relevant aircraft type if a level D FFS is
used
• 1 500 hours flight time or 250 route sectors on a relevant aircraft type if a level C FFS is
used.
NOTE : a relevant aircraft type is defined as a turbo jet transport category aeroplane
having a MTOW of not less than 10 tons or an approved passenger seating
configuration for not less than 20 passengers.
B. OPERATOR CRITERIA
• See appendix 1 to JAR FCL 1.261(c)(2)
02FFSZFTTgd.fm
02.08.02
02FFSZFTTgd.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI 02.08.02 Page 3
A380
STANDARD, LANGUAGE ADAPTED
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM AND CCQ TYPE RATING COURSES Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.08.02
DAY GA TG FS NIGHT GA TG FS
Weather : Malfunctions :
1 - EXTERIOR INSPECTION
2 - COCKPIT PREPARATION (1)
3 - ENGINE START (1)
4 - TAXI
5 - TAKE-OFF - EXTENDED DOWNWIND
6 - VISUAL APPROACH (ILS SUPPORTED IF AVAILABLE)
7 - TOUCH AND GO (2)
8 - GO AROUND ALL ENGINES
9 - FULL STOP LANDING ALL REVERSERS (3)
(1) Item to be completed only by the Trainee starting the base training flight
(2) Repeat 'Touch and go' up to proficiency with the following minima :
02flight.fm
BASE TRAINING SYLLABI 02.08.02 Page 4
A380
STANDARD, LANGUAGE ADAPTED
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM AND CCQ TYPE RATING COURSES Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.08.02
02flight.fm
RECURRENT TRAINING
04.01 - INTRODUCTION
04-00.fm
RECURRENT TRAINING 04.00 Page 2
A380 L FC4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
04.00
04-00.fm
RECURRENT TRAINING 04.01 Page 1
A380 L FC4
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
04.01INTRODUCTION
01 - GENERAL
Airbus Recurrent Training and Checking Program is designed as a unique service for the Cus-
tomer Airlines.
The analysis supporting this recommended program has been conducted in accordance with
JAR-OPS requirements. This program only covers requirements for systems review and
simulator recurrent training and checking
The operator is also responsible for the RECURRENT TRAINING AND CHECKING FOLLOW
UP in order to ensure that each pilot completes the applicable program at the required inter-
val.
02 - COURSE DESCRIPTION
The course consists of:
• Aircraft systems review
• Aircraft systems test - only if crew member's licence to be revalidated or renewed
• One 4 - hour simulator training session given by an SFI (or TRI) consisting of:
• A briefing covering technical and CRM aspects
• The Full flight simulator session on level B or higher certified simulator
• A debriefing covering technical and CRM aspects
• One 4 hours simulator checking session given by a TRE consisting of:
• A briefing covering technical and CRM aspects
• The Full flight simulator session on level B or higher certified simulator
• A debriefing covering technical and CRM aspects
There are 5 different programs - (systems review and simulator sessions). The applicable pro-
gram is identified by a letter - A to E - determined using the table below:
The normal interval between 2 Recurrent Training and Checking programs is 6 months.
04-01.fm
RECURRENT TRAINING 04.01 Page 2
A380 L FC4
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
SCENARIO
A B C D E
ATA 26 ATA 21 ATA 22 ATA 27 ATA 24
ATA 28 ATA 29 ATA 35 ATA 30 ATA 31
AIRCRAFT
ATA 32 ATA 34 ATA 33 ATA 46
SYSTEMS
ATA 42 ATA 49 ATA 36
ATA 52 ATA 70
04 - FLIGHT PREPARATION
The session documents files are available in the “INST SUP FLIGHT” menu on Airbus People
server :
- Recurrent training: the airport used is the generic airport called Airbus Training Airport (LFZZ).
04-01.fm
RECURRENT TRAINING
FFS_training.fm
RECURRENT TRAINING 04.02 Page 2
A380 L FC4
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
RECURRENT TRAINING
FFS_training.fm
RECURRENT TRAINING 04.02 Page 2A
A380 L FC4
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
04.02
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE
• Review normal, abnormal, emergency procedures and handling according to the flight
manual
• Review the selected CRM items
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
02 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. REVIEW
• Crosswind take-off / De-icing / Contaminated take-off according to scenario
• Non precision approach (FLS approach)
• Engine out procedure and handling
• Jettison and overweight procedure
• Windshear recovery procedures
• Failure management according to selections
• CRM
A. Communication
B. Leadership and teamwork
C. Workload management
D. Situation awareness
E. Problem solving and decision making
B. INTRODUCE
NIL
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
03 - SESSION PROFICIENCY CRITERIA
• Ability to demonstrate the maneuvers prescribed in this session in proper use with qualities
of prudence and care in selecting a course of action.
• Ability to apply CRM skills in all phases of flight.
FFS_training_gd.fm
RECURRENT TRAINING 04.02 Page 2B
A380 L FC4
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
04 - SESSION GUIDE
Items preceeded by :
PART 1
Engine start
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
A. Insert a HOT START on engine 4. After ECAM completion, restore and perform a manual
engine start on engine 4. Highlight the difference of protections between AUTO and MAN.
FADEC provides a passive monitoring of the start sequence in MAN. Review limitations.
B. Insert "START VALVE fault CLOSED". Emphasize the MMEL consultation. Dispatch with
the start valve inoperative on the corresponding engine and perform the manual start
valve operation
C. Insert a HUNG START on engine 1 due to low air pressure. After ECAM completion,
restore and perform a manual engine start on engine 1. Highlight the difference of
protections between AUTO and MAN. FADEC provides a passive monitoring of the start
sequence in MAN. Review limitations
D. Insert APU fault during preparation. Emphasize the MMEL consultation. Dispatch with
APU inoperative.
E. Ask the crew to start ENG 1+2 first using the supplementary procedure. Explain the
purpose of this procedure. See level 2 of supplementary procedure.
Take-Off:
A. Insert a fuel leak of 1000 kg/min on FEED TANK 1 to trigger "FUEL LEAK DETECTED"
(consider leak from engine) which takes around 3 minutes.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
After analysis and engine shutdown, consider leak continue. Consequently engine is
restarted.
For information:
- A fast fuel system leak is detected for 2T lost in 30 min.
- A slow fuel leak system is detected for 7T lost from the beginning of the flight
- For engine leak refer to FCOM aircraft system
B. Warning will be triggered after a discrepancy of 5°. The CHECK ATT message will flash for
9sec then remains steady on both PFD
C. Insert the "FLAPS locked" just before reaching Conf 1.
D. Insert cabin duct overheat. The cabin trim air valve receives a full open order. Remove the
problem. Only if temperature control system (TCS) reset is done by the crew.
E. Insert ENG 2 NORM MODE FAULT: When the ENG ALTN pb is pressed, all engines revert
to the ALT mode (4% THR penalty). FLEX and DTO not available if malfunction appears
on ground
FFS_training_gd.fm
RECURRENT TRAINING 04.02 Page 2C
A380 L FC4
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
During cruise:
A. Insert FCU 1+2 Fault. FCU backup is available on CAPT and F/O sides. Keep the problem
until approach. System will be recovered during approach.
If one channel is failed, associated EFIS CP is lost. If both channels are failed, AFS CP
and both EFIS CP are lost.
B. HYD system overheat : Insert an overheat on GREEN system and keep the overheat till
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
landing
C. Blocked PITOT : Fail both channels. insert failure on Cm1 side 2000ft before reaching the
top of climb
Radar vectors:
A. Ask (private call) Cm1 to be incapacitated and let Cm2 work alone for the approach and
the go around
B. Insert a predictive windshear about 2 miles on final
C. Destabilized approach : keep the trainee high in approach and introduce some tailwind.
Being not established at 1000ft, the trainee must go around
D. MMR 1+2 fault will induce the failure of LS 1 + 2
E. Insert Left BLG not locked down. Keep the failure inserted. The gravity extension
requested by ECAM will allow the affected gear to downlock.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
FFS_training_gd.fm
RECURRENT TRAINING 04.02 Page 2D
A380 L FC4
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
FFS_training_gd.fm
RECURRENT TRAINING
FFS_checking.fm
RECURRENT TRAINING 04.02 Page 4
A380 L FC4
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
RECURRENT CHECKING
Weather report for scenario / LFLL / 280/15 6km ovc008 15/8 1003
FFS_checking.fm
RECURRENT TRAINING 04.02 Page 4A
A380 L FC4
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
04.02
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE
• To be able to execute normal and abnormal procedure and handling.
• To attain sufficient proficiency for the recurrent check.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
02 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. REVIEW
NIL
B. INTRODUCE
NIL
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
• communicate effectively with the other crew members
• flight within the flight test tolerance prescribed by the JAR FCL,
04 - SESSION GUIDE
NIL
FFS_checking_gd.fm
RECURRENT TRAINING 04.02 Page 4B
A380 L FC4
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
FFS_checking_gd.fm
INITIAL TYPE RATING INSTRUCTOR COURSE
11.01 - INTRODUCTION
11-00.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.00 Page 2
A380 L F11
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11.00
11-00.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.01 Page 1
A380 L F11
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11.01INTRODUCTION
01 - GENERAL
The objective of the Airbus Pilot Instructor Course is to train to the level of proficiency neces-
sary for the issue of a TRI (A) rating. The course is designed to give adequate training to the
applicant in theoretical knowledge instruction, flight instruction and synthetic flight instruction
in order to instruct for Airbus (see JAR-FCL 1.365).
The privileges of the holder of a TRI rating are to instruct license holders for the issue of a
multi-pilot aero plane type rating, and the instruction required for multi-crew co-operation. The
privileges of the holder of a SFI authorization (Synthetic Flight Instructor) are to carry out syn-
thetic flight instruction for type ratings and the instruction required for multi-crew co-operation.
02 - PREREQUISITES
It is the responsibility of the airline :
• To select instructor candidates with the level of airmanship and behavior
corresponding to the role and responsibility of an airline instructor.
Prior to undertaking the Airbus Pilot Instructor Course, an applicant for the initial issue of a
TRI (MPA) rating shall have:
1.Completed at least 1500 hours flight time as a pilot of multi-pilot aero planes;
2.Completed within the 12 months preceding the application at least 30 route sectors, to
include take-offs and landings as pilot-in-command or co-pilot on the applicable aero plane
type, or a similar type as agreed by the Authority, of which not more than 15 sectors may
be completed in a flight simulator.
(1) The three route sectors may not be necessarily completed before the beginning of the Air-
bus Pilot Instructor Course and could be done after the full and successful completion of the
Airbus Pilot Instructor Course.
11-01.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.01 Page 2
A380 L F11
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11-01.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.01 Page 3
A380 L F11
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11.01
03 - COURSE DESCRIPTION
IOE
Foundation Core course FFS FIF
2 days 5 days 1 day
Initial TRI
Airborne
Foundation Core course Ground FFS sessions
FFS FIF + Flight
2 days 5 days 2 days 6 sessions
2 days
Initial SFI
Foundation Core course Ground FFS sessions
2 days 5 days 2 days 6 sessions
APT training
3 days
11-01.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.01 Page 4
A380 L F11
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
04 - COURSE DOCUMENTATION
Trainees will be provided with the following support material:
• Trainee's booklet, including the course syllabus (FCTP)
• Instructor media DVD
• Trainee DVD 1
• Jeppesen charts (for type specific course, can be provided by customers)
• Core course materials will be given during the course
• Laptop including OIS applications
05 - CRITERIA OF PROFICIENCY
a. FOUNDATION MODULE
At the end of the day 2, a written multiple choice examination will be completed.
The minimum level required, to be declared proficient, is never below 80%.
Unsatisfactory examination:
Trainee continues the course until the end of the core module.
A new satisfactory foundation module will be required before type specific module.
b. CORE COURSE
Three boxes are used to record the overall trainee's performance using "Trainee's record" file
(see next pages).
They are quoted "Satisfactory" or "Unsatisfactory".
d. AIRBORNE PHASE
11-01.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
Trainee s
CORE MODULE sticker
A380
(Refer to relevant PIR when ticked) UNSATISFACTORY
A380
SATISFACTORY
Trainee s Instructor s name
Date (DD/MM/YYYY) Comments*
signature and signature
|____|____|____|____|
Code |____|____|____|
Day 3
PROGRESS
|____|____| / |____|____| / Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
|____|____|____|____|
Code |____|____|____|
Day 5
INTRODUCTION
COURSE COMPLETION
11.01 AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
L F11
11-01.fm
11-01.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
Trainee s
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE (INITIAL) sticker
A380
A380
FFS 1
|____|____|____|____| Code |____|____|____|
FFS 2
|____|____|____|____| Code |____|____|____|
FFS3
|____|____|____|____| Code |____|____|____|
FFS4
|____|____|____|____| Code |____|____|____|
FFS5
|____|____|____|____| Code |____|____|____|
FFS check
* : Write None if no specific comments are needed
Page 6
SATISFACTORY
Trainee s Instructor s name
Date (DD/MM/YYYY) Comments*
signature and signature
|____|____|____|____|
Code |____|____|____|
FFS FIF
|____|____| / |____|____| Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
|____|____|____|____|
Code |____|____|____|
FLIGHT FIF
INTRODUCTION
11.01 AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
L F11
11-01.fm
11-01.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
Trainee s
PROGRESS INCIDENT REPORT (PIR) sticker
A380
A380
SATISFACTORY
Trainee s Instructor s name
Session* Date (DD/MM/YYYY) Comments
signature and signature
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
Name
|____|____| / |____|____| / |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|____|__|__|__|
|____|____| / |____|____| /
Code |____|____|____|
|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
|____|____|____|____|
INTRODUCTION
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
|____|____| / |____|____| /
Code |____|____|____|
|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
|____|____|____|____|
11.01 AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
L F11
11-01.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.01 Page 10
A380 L F11
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11-01.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.02 Page 1
A380 L F11
FOUNDATION MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11.02FOUNDATION MODULE
01 - GENERAL
The objective is to give to the instructor candidate some materials to teach areas relevant to
trainee's usual weakness.
DAY 1 DAY 2
11-02.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.02 Page 2
A380 L F11
FOUNDATION MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11.02
11-02.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.03 Page 1
A380 L F11
CORE MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11.03CORE MODULE
01 - GENERAL
The objective is to develop the ability to train aviation based knowledge, skills and attitudes,
including human factors.
The successful instructor trainee will have completed the first module of training towards
achievement of a TRI (A) rating or SFI authorization.
11-03.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.03 Page 2
A380 L F11
CORE MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11-03.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 1
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
11.04TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE INITIAL
01 - GENERAL
A. AIMS
The aim of the TRI (A) is to train to the level of proficiency necessary for the issue of a TRI (A)
rating. The course is designed to give adequate training to the applicant in theoretical knowl-
edge instruction; flight instruction and synthetic flight instruction in order to instruct for the Air-
bus (see JAR-FCL 1.365).
B. PREREQUISITES
TRI Instructor – Multi Pilot Aeroplanes (MPA) (JAR-FCL 1.365)
Prior to undertaking the APIC Type Specific Module (Initial), an applicant for the initial issue of
a TRI (MPA) rating shall have:
1. Completed at least 1500 hours flight time as a pilot of multi-pilot aeroplanes;
2. Completed within the 12 months preceding the application at least 30 route sectors,
to include take-offs and landings as pilot-in-command or co-pilot on the applicable
aeroplane type, or a similar type as agreed by the Authority, of which not more than
15 sectors may be completed in a flight simulator
3. Completed approved instructor Core Instructor Competencies (Teaching and
Learning) training.
SFI Instructor
Prior to undertaking the APIC Type Specific Module (Initial), an applicant for the initial issue of
an SFI (MPA) Authorization shall :
C. OBJECTIVES
The successful students will be able to:
• Operate a simulator, qualified and approved in accordance with JAR-STD 1A for the
purpose of carrying out flight instruction.
• Carry out instruction for type rating on the Airbus , including the planning, briefing,
training, assessment and de-briefing of type technical and non-technical skills.
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be eligible for the issue of:
11-04.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 2
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
OR
• Synthetic Flight Instructor
The privileges of the holder of an SFI (A) authorization are to carry out synthetic flight
instruction for type rating, and the instruction required for multi-crew cooperation (see
JAR-FCL 1.261 (d), Appendix 1 to JAR-FCL 1.261 (d) and AMC FCL 1.261 (d)).
For clarity and ease of reference, the following terminology will be used in the course
documentation, and during the conduct of the course:
02 - COURSE PREPARATION
A. BACKGROUND
This course assumes that the TRI STUDENT has a high level of knowledge of aircraft sys-
tems and procedures.
The customer is responsible to ensure that the TRI STUDENT has the potential to complete
the course successfully.
The course is intended for experienced pilots who have assimilated a high level of
technical knowledge and been selected for training as TRI.
It is expected that TRI STUDENTS will spend time preparing for the course in advance.
The course is not intended to make good any shortfall in technical knowledge; those
students who do not prepare are unlikely to succeed.
The function of the course is to introduce and practice the training skills appropriate to type
transition and check/refresher training.
The course syllabus uses selected elements of exercises from a typical Type Rating Transi-
tion Course and sessions, to provide the environment for the development of instructional
technique.
It is assumed that this trainee will have assimilated the knowledge from a ground school
course but will have had no exposure to the cockpit environment.
The trainee will operate from the appropriate pilot seat, with the non-operating TRI STUDENT
occupying the vacant seat and performing in a competent manner.
The trainee will display a range of abilities and behaviours, consistent with the role adopted
for the session. Errors observed by the TRI STUDENT should be analysed and corrected,
concentrating on the underlying problems encountered by the trainee. The TRI STUDENT
should concentrate on root error causes and deficiencies of technique and not simply offer
advice to correct the error symptom.
11-04.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 3
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
C. TRAINING TECHNIQUES
The skills required to deliver type transition and recurrent training include briefing, demonstra-
tion (handling), observation, objective analysis, facilitation, feedback and report writing. The
primary training skills developed in the core instructor competencies (teaching and learning)
course will be reinforced with practical examples.
The TRI STUDENT will be expected to prepare simulator briefing, during which the TRI
TUTOR will examine, selected topics relevant to the simulator session. The TRI STUDENT
will then give a simulator session brief to the trainee. He or she is expected to use all relevant
documentation (OIS applications).
TRI STUDENTS will be required to prepare lessons plans, adapting the information provided
in the course session
During the sessions the TRI STUDENT will be required to demonstrate procedures and
manoeuvres, to observe the trainee’s performance, to provide analysis/feedback and write a
clear objective trainee’s report. The TRI TUTOR will provide technique training and feedback
for the TRI STUDENT. The course makes extensive use of video recording and playback to
maximise TRI STUDENT learning.
Successful completion of the final check will enable an application for TRI Rating (simulator
only) to be made. The check is a confirmation that the TRI STUDENT has reached the
required level of competence required for rating issue.
Upon successful completion of the course, a recommendation will be made to the customer
that the TRI STUDENT can be issued with a TRI rating (simulator), subject to any national
licensing authority requirements. Prior to exercising the privileges of this rating, Airbus will rec-
ommend a period of supervision for the successful TRI STUDENT. This period could be any-
thing from the conduct of 1simulator session under supervision, to a complete transition
course under supervision. The recommendation will be tailored to meet perceived individual
TRI STUDENT needs. It is not mandatory but recommended.
D. SUPPORT
TRI STUDENTS will be provided with the following support material:
1) Trainee Booklet including the course syllabus
2) All Instructor Media DVD
3) Trainee DVD 1
4) Selected relevant Airport Charts
5) Task sharing and callouts booklet
6) Extract of QRH
7) Course Schedule with relevant contact information
8) A laptop including OIS applications
Using this material, the TRI STUDENT will be expected to start preparing for the simulator
exercises outlined in this syllabus.
The course can be fully customized, in which case items 4 and 6 will be provided by the cus-
tomer
11-04.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 4
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
Trainees
The 2 trainees will be role played by the TRI TUTOR/S. They will be:
Trainee A
Captain (tutor first name) Crusty
55 years old. 15,000 flying hours. 6,000 hours flying a B737 300/400/500 or equivalent
Trainee B
First Officer (tutor first name) Green
23 years old. 600 flying hours mainly single and light twin piston. No airline experience.
Completed ELT.
The next 6 days follow the format of 2 hours of briefing and classroom work for the 2 TRI STU-
DENTS (except for the final day 6 which has 3 hours), followed by a 4 hour full flight simulator
(FFS) session, and finishing with a one-hour de-briefing and re-briefing for the following day.
Each TRI STUDENT will in turn, deliver 30 minutes of briefings to the trainee. The main brief-
ing topic should require 20 minutes coverage, with the other topic requiring 10 minutes.
The TRI TUTOR will analyse these briefings and provide feedback to the TRI STUDENT prior
to the Sim session.
Each half of the Sim Session (1:30) will be a practical lesson based on these briefings. The
TRI STUDENT will plan the session and order of events as appropriate. The trainee will fly the
session as briefed; it may be obvious that one or more of the items is causing significant prob-
lems to the trainee, necessitating a demonstration from the TRI STUDENT. The exercises are
continued until either the trainee reaches a satisfactory standard, or the TRI TUTOR decides
to terminate that particular item and to move on to the next.
On completion of the simulator exercise, TRI STUDENT will debrief the trainee, before writing
handover notes. The TRI TUTOR will then debrief the TRI STUDENT.
For this TRI STUDENTS will be provided with fictitious trainee files.
The emphasis throughout will be on quality of instruction, the accuracy of analysis, and the
relevance of any remedial action recommended by the TRI STUDENT, rather than amount of
material covered.
11-04.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 5
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
The list below covers the major items to be covered during each simulator session:
FBW Protections, visual pattern, crosswind takeoff and landing, sidestick logic,
FFS 2
take over methods, windshear recovery
F. SIMULATOR SEATING
There will be 2 TRI TUTORS for each day. The role-play will be split with one TRI TUTOR
allocated to each trainee (A or B) The simulator sessions will be divided so that the TRI
TUTOR for the session occupies the PF seat, e.g.
11-04.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 6
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
G. ASSESSMENT
TRI STUDENT progress will be continually assessed throughout the course, and he or she
will only be presented for the Final Check if the Course TRI TUTOR is confident that the
required standard will be achieved.
If there is doubt as about successful outcome of the course, the TRI STUDENT will be
advised and any necessary remedial action discussed.
For the Final Check the TRI STUDENT will be asked to construct a simulator session and
briefing based on one of the 4 Test Scenarii. The test will begin with a briefing for the exer-
cises shown on the test scenario. The simulator exercise will last no longer than 1hour 30 min-
utes for each TRI STUDENT. This will be followed by analysis, assessment and feedback of
the trainee’s performance, including recommendations for further training as appropriate.
DAY 3 DAY 4
DAY 5 DAY 6
DAY 7 DAY 8
11-04.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 6A
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
11.01INTRODUCTION
DAY 1 (Ground)
During introductory discussions, make sure TRI STUDENTS are both prepared to present an
Airbus fly by wire accident
Ensure TRI STUDENTS have all the required materials. Escort them as necessary to obtain
the instructor laptop.
TUTOR ONLY
Course Introduction (1.00)
Using the Introduction Section, present a short briefing outlining the content and philosophy of
the course:
Pre-requisites (knowledge and experience)
Talk about assumptions and the need for a high level of technical knowledge
Course Objective
Be concise and tell them the objective is to prepare them so that they can adapt to any sylla-
bus and have the basic tools needed to brief, operate the simulator, observe, teach, demon-
strate and debrief.
JAR-FCL Requirements
Briefly introduce the regulation or adapt to local regulations for TRI
Course Method and the use of role-play
Describe the purpose of role-play, for the TUTOR to control the instruction and ensure TRI
STUDENTS exposure to different types of trainee.
Describe each role and ensure TRI STUDENTS understand
TUTOR ONLY
TUTOR PF
TUTOR IOS
TRI STUDENT
Trainee
Facilitate a brief discussion on the relative challenges that each trainee may present use of
video recording and playback.
Explain the purpose and use. Ensure TRI STUDENTS know the tapes will be destroyed
Video will only be used until briefing skills reach the required standard
day1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 6B
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
Outline the purpose of the test but make it clear there will be assessment throughout and TRI
STUDENTS will not be entered for the test unless there is a high probability of success.
Ask the trainees to write their hopes and concerns (what they do want, what they do not want)
about the course and then collect them explaining that they will be used in the final part of the
course
Hand out post it notes each (2 colours) – (used in final collective debrief)
EFFECTIVE TRAINING
“Think back to who was a good instructor, have their name in mind. Identify 2 or 3 character-
istics and write them down, individually.”
TUTOR ONLY
“Think back to who was a poor instructor, have their name in mind. Identify 2 or 3 character-
istics and write them down, individually.”
Tell the TRI STUDENT that this defines effective instruction/ineffective training and appropri-
ate/inappropriate behavior
day1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 6C
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
ACCIDENT PRESENTATIONS
Student Presentations
A review of human factors related fly-by-wire Airbus accidents. The presentation should not
exceed the allotted time and may include any available tools. e.g:
-White Board
-Flip Chart
TUTOR ONLY
-PowerPoint
PROCEDURES (1.00)
TRI STUDENT B will complete a short review summarizing normal procedures from ‘COCK-
PIT PREPARATION’ to ‘CLIMB’ (0:30) as though he would describe the process to a new
trainee having completed only CBT ground training. The TUTOR/S will interrupt as necessary
with questions to check understanding.
TUTOR ONLY
TRI STUDENT A will complete a similar review describing normal procedures from ‘CRUISE
‘to ‘SHUTDOWN’ (0:30)
Ask them to use the cockpit panel diagrams as appropriate.
The purpose of this is to demonstrate to the TRI STUDENTS the difficulties in simply talking
and describing a familiar sequence of events in a simple way that can be understood by new
trainees.
day1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 6D
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
What
They must know, should know, and need to know. Governed by the course syllabus material.
There is some limited flexibility to adapt to the trainee’s needs, but all topics must be covered
in accordance with the approved course
Where
Ensure any health and safety requirements are fully understood. Know the limitations and
functionality of any venue
When
How Long. It is important for trainees to know how long the training will last. They have per-
sonal needs and should have clear expectations.
How
Tell them what, tell them, and tell them what you’ve told them.
Visual aids
Explain the purpose of the briefing for this course (normally each TRI STUDENT briefs 2 top-
ics and the briefings are split between 2 TRI STUDENTS – Use a session guide as example)
TUTOR ONLY
day1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 6E
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
TUTOR ONLY
- Finish the briefing about 10 min prior start of session
- On the whiteboard:
• Draw pictures, diagrams rather then text
• Use appropriate colours; avoid writing sentences in red
- Address both trainees
- Ask questions
- Refer to approved documents only
The TRI STUDENTS will prepare a brief of approximately 30 minutes duration for FFS 1,
based on the FFS1 session guide. They should be encouraged to order the briefing to suit
them, and to insert additional briefing items if they feel that to do so will make the detail
flow more effectively.
TUTOR ONLY
They should be encouraged to order the briefing to suit them, and to insert additional
briefing items if they feel that to do so will make the detail flow more effectively.
The briefings should be constructed to use only the white board and cockpit panels.
day1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 6F
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
day1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 6G
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
TR 0111.01INTR UCTIO
DAY 2 (Ground)
REVIEW (00:15)
TUTOR ONLY
The purpose of this exercise is to practice briefing technique and make any refinements prior
to the final briefing for FFS 1 to be given prior to the session.
Record and de-brief the exercise in sequence.
Emphasise any positive aspects of the TRI STUDENT performance. Ask them what they will
do differently next time. Limit negative comments as much as possible.
Having already discussed the briefing for FFS 1 on day 1, the presentation should flow rea-
sonably well. You are looking for technical accuracy, style, content and effective time man-
agement. The TRI STUDENT will almost certainly have difficulty fitting the briefing into the
time available.
Review the philosophy of abnormal procedure handling. Talk about Airbus or customer pro-
cedures as applicable and clarify PF/PNF roles.
Use of ECAM
- Limitations to use
• Not always showing appropriate procedure.
TUTOR ONLY
• Cross check with system display
- Common errors in use
Ensure the TRI STUDENTS have a clear sequence in mind for ECAM handling and the man-
agement of abnormal and emergency situations.
day2_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 6H
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
LUNCH (1:00)
SIMULATORS (1.00)
The purpose of this is to review the operation of simulators as follows:
- Approvals and Documentation
- Role
- Design, including safety systems
- Limitations
- The basic functions – key points
- The purpose and use of the simulator session guide.
TUTOR ONLY
Remind them that the simulator is the most powerful tool available to the instructor, and if
used incorrectly has the ability to demoralise and destroy the trainee. Many trainees are
apprehensive of simulators, due to past experiences, and the TRI STUDENTS must do every-
thing possible to utilise the device in a positive manner so as to encourage and develop
trainee skills. Explain the value of simulator session guides – but point out that they must
learn the fundamentals of simulator operation first.
Where possible in a break between simulator sessions as time permits, take the TRI STU-
DENTS and demonstrate the key IOS functions (MASTER INDEX, INIT, REPOS)
day2_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 6I
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
Ensure they are given a copy of the safety briefing and know how to perform the setup,
reposition, and flight plan copy.
EXERCISE (1:00)
Explain to the TRI STUDENTS that one of the main challenges of training is to take complex
topics and present them in a simple and uncomplicated manner.
Tell them they have 30 minutes in which to prepare a short 10-minute presentation on one of
the following subjects:
TUTOR ONLY
- FBW engine failure above V1, rotation technique.
- FBW crosswind landing technique or GPWS recovery.
The presentation should be directed towards a pilot with no technical knowledge of the air-
craft, as though he/she is part of a team assessing the potential purchase of a FBW Airbus.
Emphasis should be on practical application and the operational advantages of the system,
plus detailed information on flying techniques.
Allow them the use of any available material, including extracts from the FCTM.
A review of the tools and skills required assessing and improving trainee performance:
Organization
Observation
Listening
TUTOR ONLY
Note taking
Intervention
Proficiency standards
Session Objectives
Planning the de-brief
day2_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 6J
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
Knowledge
Skill
Attitude
=
Competence
TUTOR ONLY
Question: Ok yes but is there another way, what about an active training method that does
not involve showing or telling? Use a practical example (e.g. riding a bike)
Allow a discussion to develop, but this should be revision, so the answer is
Answer: They figure it out (facilitation)
Tell the trainees: Ok now we have 2 teaching techniques the important thing is to decide
when to use each
Question: What about knowledge, we have said we normally instruct knowledge, but can
we facilitate?
Answer: Try to find an example to show how exhausting facilitation could be when the
trainees do not have the knowledge.
TUTOR ONLY
Question: So what about attitude? Can we tell someone to change his or her attitude?
Answer: Use the example of teenagers, ask the TRI STUDENTS how effective it is to tell
them to change behaviour/ attitude. Talk about examples, e.g. ‘ joy riders’ (young people
who steal cars and drive them at high speed)
Ask why telling them to change their behaviour does not work?
Tell them that, although they may know what they are doing is socially unacceptable, within
their peer group they believe it is the right thing to do at the time
Make a link to CRM in aviation with an experienced captain who refuses to discuss actions
in abnormal procedures with his co-pilot. Give an example of telling and ask how effective
this will be?
day2_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 6K
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
Summarise saying that the vast majority of accidents have a human element. As design
reliability improves the only way to drive down the accident rate is to address the human
element, in particular behaviour. To do this requires development of facilitation skills.
Tell them they will have opportunities to practice facilitation throughout the remainder of the
course, both in the simulator and in debriefs.
SHOW VIDEO
TUTOR ONLY
A short discussion about the tools needed to assess and debrief trainees. Encourage the TRI
STUDENTS to think about root causes rather than symptoms. The key to this is effective
observation, listening organization and note taking.
Remind the TRI STUDENTS that the session guide constructed is just a guide and contains
objectives to be achieved. Nothing should prevent them changing a plan if it becomes neces-
sary to reinforce some lessons. The TRI is in command of the session. Encourage them to
intervene and change the sequence of events as necessary to respond to the needs of the
trainee.
Identify instructional and facilitative techniques and the uses of each. There is no point in
facilitating when the trainee does not have the knowledge or self-awareness to arrive at the
TUTOR ONLY
desired conclusion.
day2_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 6L
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
Talk briefly about behavioral markers and the CRM assessment and development systems
- Session Management
- Observational skills
- Note taking (trainees memorize the content of the session, TRI STUDENTS must use
notes
- Recurrent Errors
- Information for debriefing
- Structure and Timing (Give the trainees a short break – compose notes)
- Facilitate Introduction – add to this
- Do they have any questions
TUTOR ONLY
Note: Ensure they have a copy of and are familiar with the Airbus CRM standards
TUTOR ONLY
day2_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 7
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 1
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
33R 330/10 CAVOK 20/10 QNH 1010 QFE 981 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT GATE A1
FLT NBR A/L 101
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL 1 - FFS SAFETY
2 - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
CPNY RTE AIBAIB1 3 - ENG START / AFTER START
ALTN RTE AIBLYS 4 - TAXI
0:50 5 - TAKE OFF v v
CRZ FL FL 70 CRZ TEMP -7°C 6 - CLIMB FL 120 v v
7 - A/THR DEMO v
CI 90 TROPO 36090 8 - DES-STAR v v v
9 - ILS APP v v
TRIP WIND HD 15
10 - LANDING
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD
INIT TAKE OFF
385 t 65 t
GW FOB
847 000 lb 143 000 lb 1:20 11 - TAKE OFF
12 - RADAR VECTORS v v
320 t 13 - ILS APPROACH v v
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 lb 14 - GO AROUND v v
15 - ILS APPROACH v v
NOTES
16 - LANDING
DAY VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE 17 - AFTER LANDING
RWY COND DRY (SID MOU 1N) 18 - TAXI
AIR COND ON PAX NUMBER : 250 1:50 19 - PARKING
ANTI ICE OFF E
E
Briefing Topics
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
TRI STUDENT B
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF Take off sequence and A/THR
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 122 TOGA V1 125 TOGA TRI STUDENT A
ILS Approach and Go around
VR 127 v FLEX 58 VR 126 v FLEX 57
Note : Each TRI STUDENT will conduct the entire
V2 133 DERATED V2 132 DERATED
session plan.
FLAPS 3 THS FOR FLAPS 3 THS FOR
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs1.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 8
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
ffs1.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 8A
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Practice cockpit preparation (real environment).
• Introduction to aircraft handling characteristics.
• Use of A/THR.
• Practise ILS approach go around and landing.
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• Cockpit preparation using aircraft equipments in a real environment.
B. NEW EXERCISES :
• TAKE OFF
• USE OF A/THR
• ILS APPROACH
• GO AROUND
• LANDING
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides
• FCOM
• FCTM
D. REFERENCES
• BRIEFING GUIDES
Taxi + Takeoff + Landing + ILS approach
• FCOM
Standard flight profile - SOP's
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Standard Operating Procedures
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Task Sharing
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Normal Checklists
• FCTM
Handling in normal operations
- Normal Operations / Taxi + Before Takeoff + Takeoff + Climb+ Descent Preparation +
Descent + Approach + ILS Approach + Go Around + After Landing + Parking + Standard
Callouts
ffs1gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 8B
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
9 : Stabilized approach to allow the trainee to feel the aircraft configuration changes
through his manual handling.
ffs1gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 8C
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
COCKPIT PREPARATION
Detailed information on preparing the cockpit for departure is to be found in FCOM and in the
FCTM. For the first session, the trainees perform a preliminary and a complete cockpit prep-
aration. Initially you can help your trainees when the configuration is incorrect but after a few
sessions they should be able to do it themselves.
Try to focus your attention on the trainees and keep the IOS inputs as simple as possible
Create realism by ensuring the aircraft is at the gate, the cockpit is correctly set, doors are
open.
Set the environment according to the session guide.
Try to simulate the normal sequence of events, e.g. fuel loading, pax boarding, doors closing,
final load information.
Task sharing and areas of responsibility may need to be clear explanation. Encourage ensure
good crew communication and crosschecking.
ffs1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 8D
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
Climb
Try not to freeze the simulator position, much better to give a sequence of vectors.Try to
maintain your own situation awareness and the distance to the airport appropriate for a
descent and approach without wasting time.
Arrival
Radar vectors should give the trainees some little time to settle down before making the
Approach. Final vectors should allow for a 30° - 40° intercept heading. Encourage awareness
of the TO WPT and flight plan sequence.
Typical briefing
Typical debriefing
ffs1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 8E
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
GENERAL
Ensure the TRI STUDENTS have an opportunity to ask questions before starting their brief-
ings, to clear up any uncertainties.
Arrange the video so you can see the white board and STUDENT. Try to make a note of any
interesting aspects of behaviour or body language. At this stage pay close attention to style
and delivery as well as technical content.
TUTOR ONLY
The briefing may overrun the planned time of 30 minutes. Allow a small overrun for this ses-
sion but emphasise to the TRI STUDENTS the need for good time management. The STU-
DENTS will almost certainly be nervous.
Complete the cockpit preparation at normal speed as a competent pilot so as not to waste
time, but make some minor mistakes.
For the IOS Tutor, give positive instruction and guidance in setting the IOS, appropriate levels
of commentary, when to intervene. The emphasis at this stage is on telling the TRI STU-
DENTS when to act and how to act. Try to allow the TRI STUDENT to manage the session
as much as possible. Excessive tutor interventions can reduce the value of the exercise.
TUTOR ONLY
DEBRIEF AND PREPARATION
The TRI STUDENTS will deliver a short debrief after the session. Ensure that they identify
the key learning points and test learning and summarise the session.
The TRI TUTOR will then debrief the TRI STUDENTS. Offer advice and encouragement and
keep criticism to a minimum. Try to use open questions to enable self-learning. Remember
that the workload for the TRI STUDENTS is now extremely high and they will be feeling con-
siderable pressure.
The TRI STUDENTS must begin work on their briefing for the conduct of FFS 2. This session
deals with FBW protections, visual patterns and crosswind take-off/landing. An experienced
Airbus FBW pilot should feel comfortable with these subjects.
ffs1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 8F
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
ffs1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 9
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 2
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
33R 330/10 CAVOK 20/10 QNH 1010 QFE 981 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT HOLDING POINT
FLT NBR A/L 102
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL 1 - COCKPIT SETUP FOR TAKE OFF BY TRI
STUDENT
CPNY RTE AIBAIB1 2 - TAKE OFF v v
ALTN RTE AIBLYS 3 - CLIMB FL 120 v v v
4 - DEMO NORMAL LAW AND v
CRZ FL FL 70 CRZ TEMP -7°C PROTECTIONS
5 - DES - STAR v v v
CI 90 TROPO 36090 6 - SIDESTICK PRIORITY (DEMO) v v
7 - ILS APPROACH v v
TRIP WIND HD 15
1:00 8 - LANDING
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD
INIT TAKE OFF - WIND 050/20
385 t 65 t
GW FOB
847 000 lb 143 000 lb 9 - TAKE OFF - CROSSWIND v v
10 - VISUAL PATTERN (ILS ASSISTED) v v
320 t 11 - GO AROUND v v
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 lb 12 - VISUAL PATTERN (ILS ASSISTED) v v
1:20 13 - LANDING - CROSSWIND
NOTES
DAY VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE INIT TAKE OFF - WIND 050/10
RWY COND DRY (SID MOU 1N)
AIR COND ON PAX NUMBER : 250 14 - TAKE OFF - REACTIVE WINDSHEAR v v
ANTI ICE OFF 15 - VISUAL APPROACH (ILS ASSISTED) - v v
EXTEND DOWNWIND
E
16 - WINDSHEAR ON APPROACH v v
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272 17 - GO AROUND v v
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF 18 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t 1:50 19 - LANDING
E
V1 122 TOGA V1 125 TOGA Briefing Topics
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
Note : Each TRI STUDENT will conduct the entire
VR FLEX VR FLEX session plan.
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs2.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 10
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
ffs2.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 10A
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Introduction to “Normal Law” - Envelope protections.
• Practice visual pattern, go around and landing.
• Practice windshear.
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• TAKEOFF
• ILS APP
• GO AROUND
• LANDING
B. NEW EXERCISES :
• NORMAL LAW - PROTECTIONS
• SIDE STICK PRIORITY
• VISUAL PATTERN
• WINDSHEAR
• CROSSWIND TAKEOFF AND LANDING
C. SUPPORT :
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides
• FCOM
• FCTM
D. REFERENCES
• BRIEFING GUIDES
Taxi + Takeoff + Landing + Normal Law + Visual Pattern + Velocity Vector + Windshear
• FCOM
Standard flight profile - SOP's
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Standard Operating Procedures
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Task Sharing
- Procedures / Normal Procedures / Normal Checklists
Normal Law
- Aircraft systems / 27 - Flight Controls / Flight Control System / Normal Law
Protections
- Aircraft systems / 22 - 27 - Flight Envelope / Operating Speeds + Protections
ffs2gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 10B
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
ffs2gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 10C
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
4 : VV design
- Explain that whatever the size and the color, VV indicates always the same thing /
the track (TRK) and the flight path angle (FPA).
- The message to be adressed about size and color is :
• Size means FD status
• small : FD ON follow FD
• big : FD OFF follow VV
• Color means
• black = HDG / VS
• green = TRK / FPA
Protections
Trainee 1 performs all the protections exercices in clean configuration.
Trainee 2 performs only the high angle of attack protection in landing
configuration.
AP OFF - FD ON - A/THR OFF
- Roll: speed around 280 kts
• From the above ask the pilot to practice 45° bank angle turns
• Ask the pilot to increase bank angle to the maximum (67°)
• Emphasize that the max bank angle corresponds to the max G load (2.5 G),
displayed on SD
- Pitch: speed around 280kts
• Apply progressively maximum full up side stick deflection
• Emphasize maximum pitch up to 30° reduced to 25° at low speed
• Alpha floor could engage due to high angle of attack protection
• Repeat the same demonstration for maximum full down side stick deflection
(maximum 15° pitch down): do not engage high speed protection and resume
normal flight
ffs2gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 10D
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
7 : Decelerated approach.
ffs2gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 11
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 3
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
33R 290/10 5000 M RA OVC 005 8/6 QNH 1003 Time EVENTS
ATHR
QFE 974
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT HOLDING POINT
FLT NBR A/L 103
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL 1 - COCKPIT SETUP FOR TAKE OFF BY TRI
STUDENT
CPNY RTE AIBAIB1 2 - TAKE OFF v v
ALTN RTE AIBLYS 3 - FLAP AUTO RETRACTION DEMO v v v
4 - CLIMB FL 70 v v v
CRZ FL FL 70 CRZ TEMP -7°C 5 - ECAM DEMONSTRATION v v v
6 - DES - STAR v v v
CI 90 TROPO 36090 7 - VOR DME APPROACH (FLS) v v v v
HD 15 8 - GO AROUND FROM MDA v v v
TRIP WIND
9 - VOR DME APPROACH (SELECTED) v v v v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD 1:00 10 - LANDING
385 t 65 t
GW FOB INIT TAKE OFF
847 000 lb 143 000 lb
11 - TAKE OFF v v
320 t 12 - FUEL LEAK (FROM ENGINE) v v v v
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 lb 13 - VOR DME APPROACH (FLS) v v v v
1:30 14 - LANDING
NOTES
DAY VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE
INIT TAKE OFF
RWY COND WET (SID MOU 1N)
AIR COND ON PAX NUMBER : 250 15 - TAKE OFF v v
ANTI ICE ON 16 - PACK 1 OVHT v v v
E
17 - RADAR VECTORS v v v
18 - LOC / FLS APPROACH v v v v
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
1:50 19 - LANDING
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF E
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t Briefing Topics
V1 122 TOGA V1 125 TOGA
TRI STUDENT B
Long - Selected non-precision approach.
VR 126 v FLEX 55 VR 126 v FLEX 55
Short - ECAM handling process
V2 132 DERATED V2 132 DERATED TRI STUDENT A
Long - FLS approach
FLAPS 3 THS FOR FLAPS 3 THS FOR Short - Fuel leak procedure
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
Note : Each TRI STUDENT will conduct the entire
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA session plan.
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs3.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 12
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
ffs3.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 12A
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Practice Non Precision Approaches.
• Practice ECAM handling.
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• TAKEOFF
• CLIMB
• GO AROUND
• LANDING
B. NEW EXERCISES :
• NON PRECISION APPROACHES
• ECAM HANDLING
• FUEL LEAK
• PACK OVHT
C. SUPPORT / REFERENCES :
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides
• FCOM
• FCTM
ffs3gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 12B
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
3 : When conf 1+F, ask to the trainees to maintain configuration until observing autore-
traction at 212 kts and charge on PFD 1+F to 1.
Activate the not sensed L/G LDG with Abnormal WING & BODY L/Gs : Explain that
there are few procedures whose management is different. Those PROC are dis-
played until the landing, disregarding normal C/L.
ECAM system management : Insert ENG 1 FIRE and perform ECAM actions.
Restore
9 : On the IOS, insert GPS PRIMARY LOST to get F-APP + RAW. Then on the position
monitor MFD page, insert RNP less than EPU to get NAV ACCU LOW and FLS: raw
only
12 : Insert a fuel leak of 1000 kg/min on FEED TANK 1 to trigger “FUEL LEAK
DETECTED” (consider leak from engine) which takes around 3 minutes. On IOS do
not clear malfunction but select a leak of 0 kg/min.
After analyse and engine shutdown, consider leak stopped.
Consequently engine is kept shutdown.
For information:
- A fast fuel leak is detected for 2T lost in 30 min.
- A slow fuel leak is detected for 8T lost from the beginning of the flight.
ffs3gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 12C
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
ffs3_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 12D
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
GENERAL
The TRI STUDENTS should now have a clear idea of the strengths and weaknesses of the
trainees and should adapt the FFS 3 session accordingly, as well as covering the required syl-
labus of precision and non-precision approaches, and simple failures.
The briefings and simulator handling should be improving. They should now be able to identify
and debrief the majority of the errors made by the trainees. There may be a tendency for them
to examine performance closely and look for minor errors, as they will be keen to demonstrate
that they see everything. Concentrate on the areas they consider may require remedial train-
TUTOR ONLY
Possible errors:
- Resistance to technology and use of TRK/FPA
- Late configuration, high on the profile, chasing from above
- Not selecting or monitoring raw data
- Poor visual transition at MDA, FD remain on and ‘ducks under’ the slope
There should be plenty to debrief. Make sure the TRI STUDENTS are prioritising correctly,
and have a clear strategy of the remedial training that may be needed.
STUDENTS to give praise as well as criticism and to end the debrief on a positive note.
FFS 4 is the first major failure handling exercise with engine failure. TRI STUDENTS should
be left to prepare the session. Encourage them to use the tools provided.
REVIEW
The course tutor/s should review the TRI STUDENTS progress at this point. Be honest about
progress to-date; give praise where appropriate; ensure that where there is doubt about
progress there will be a further review after each day. The course is very time limited and
there is little scope for remedial training.
ffs3_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 13
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 4
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
33R 300/10 5000 OVC 005 20/10 QNH 1020 Time EVENTS
ATHR
QFE 991
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT HOLDING POINT
FLT NBR A/L 104
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL 1 - COCKPIT SETUP FOR TAKE OFF BY TRI
STUDENT
CPNY RTE AIBAIB1 2 - TAKE OFF v v
ALTN RTE AIBLYS 3 - ENGINE OUT FAMILIARIZATION v v
385 t 65 t v v
GW FOB 1:10 6 - TAKE OFF - ENGINE FAIL AT V2
847 000 lb 143 000 lb 7 - ILS APPROACH - ONE ENG OUT v v
8 - GO AROUND v v
320 t 9 - ILS APPROACH - TWO ENG OUT v v
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 lb 10 - LANDING - TWO ENG OUT
NOTES
1:50 INIT TAKE OFF
DAY VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE
RWY COND DRY (SID MOU 1N) 11 - REJECTED TAKE OFF
AIR COND ON PAX NUMBER : 250 E
ANTI ICE OFF Briefing Topics
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272 TRI STUDENT A
Long - Engine failure between V1 and V2
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF Short - Rejected Takeoff
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 122 TOGA V1 125 TOGA TRI STUDENT B
Long - 2 engines out approach
VR 126 v FLEX 59 VR 126 v FLEX 58 Short - Emergency evacuation
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs4.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 14
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
ffs4.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 14A
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Engine-out ILS approach and go around - manually flown
• Rejected Takeoff - EMER EVAC
• Practice two engines inop landing
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• Takeoff
• ECAM management
B. NEW EXERCISES :
• Engine failure after V1
• Engine relight
• 2 engines inop approach and landing
C. SUPPORT / REFERENCES :
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides
• FCOM
• FCTM
ffs4gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 14B
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
4 : Engine fail with no damage, until acceptable proficiency, if not, TRI STUDENT
demonstration
ffs4gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 14C
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
Issue 06 02.04
Common Errors:
- Over rotation on take off leading to speed below V2.
- FMA changes not announced.
- ß Target not fully centred.
- Not trimming the rudder.
- ECAM non-reversible actions carried out without proper crew confirmation.
- Missed Approach procedure or ATC instructions not accurately followed.
- Poor maintenance and monitoring of required track.
- Lack of task sharing discipline during manual flight (FCU actions).
- Not rotating to correct pitch attitude on go-around.
- Not aware of MSA.
REJECTED TAKE-OFF
Common Errors:
- Disarming of auto brake due to instinctive manual braking.
- ATC and / or Cabin crew not informed.
- Reversers remain engaged after aircraft stop.
- Omitting to set parking brake on.
- Inability to use mechanical seat controls once the aircraft no longer has a source of AC
power.
ffs4_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 14D
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
GENERAL
Ask one TRI STUDENT to brief engine failure between V1 and V2, and the other the engine-
out approach profile and actions through to an ILS and go-around, ENG OUT landing, RTO &
EVAC.
Despite the ease with which the one engine out may be flown, the trainee will have problems.
Typical errors:
- Over-rotation,
- Not using rudder trim,
- Centering the beta target with trim only,
- Over controlling in pitch,
- Under rotating during the Go Around,
- Not following the Engine Out Go Around profile,
- GA TRK when following a missed approach procedure.
Any weak areas must be thoroughly examined. TUTORS ensure the TRI STUDENT is given
an opportunity to develop and demonstrate his proficiency. There should be at least one
opportunity for the TRI STUDENT to demonstrate from a seat, as this is a test requirement.
Do not tell him when to demonstrate but make the role play clear so he is easily able to judge
the correct moment
a clear debrief, delivered with conviction, prioritising on the main areas of weakness. Any
remedial training required should be detailed to the tutor at this stage.
Re-emphasise the necessity of writing clear and precise notes and if necessary a PIR.
- The briefings, conduct of the detail, and debriefings, will by now certainly be indicative of
the standard likely to be achieved during the conduct of the final assessment.
ffs4_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 15
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 05 FEB 2009
E
FFS 5
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
33R 240/10 5000 OVC 005 20/10 QNH 1020 Time EVENTS
ATHR
QFE 991
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT HOLDING POINT
FLT NBR A/L 105
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL 1 - COCKPIT SETUP FOR TAKE OFF BY TRI
STUDENT
CPNY RTE AIBAIB1 2 - TAKE OFF v v
ALTN RTE AIBLYS 3 - DOWNWIND - BUSS DEMO v
0:40 4 - LANDING DIRECT LAW
CRZ FL FL 70 CRZ TEMP -7°C
INIT FL 350
CI 90 TROPO 36090
HD 15 5 - EMERGENCY DESCENT - EXCESSIVE v v v
TRIP WIND
CAB ALT - RESTORE
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD 6 - HYD G+Y SYS PRESS LO v v
7 - ILS APPROACH v v
385 t 65 t 1:20 8 - LANDING ALTN LAW
GW FOB
847 000 lb 143 000 lb
INIT TAKE OFF
320 t
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 lb 9 - TAKE OFF
10 - FLAPS LOCKED BY WTB DURING v v
NOTES
RETRACTION
DAY VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE 1:50 11 - LANDING WITH FLAPS LOCKED
RWY COND DRY (SID MOU 1N) E
AIR COND ON PAX NUMBER : 250 Briefing Topics
ANTI ICE OFF
E TRI STUDENT B
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272 Long - Emergency descent (structural damage)
Short - Approach and Landing with flaps locked
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t TRI STUDENT A
V1 122 TOGA V1 125 TOGA Long - HYD G + Y SYS PRESS LO
Short - Emergency descent (no structural damage)
VR 125 v FLEX 57 VR 125 v FLEX 57
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs5.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 16
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
ffs5.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 16A
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Practice Emergency Descent
• Practice dual hydraulic failure event
• Practice SLATS / FLAPS malfunction techniques
• Practice BUSS
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• NIL.
B. NEW EXERCISES :
• Emergency descent
• HYD G + Y SYS PRESS LO
• Landing with flaps locked
• BUSS DEMO
C. SUPPORT / REFERENCES :
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides
• FCOM
• FCTM
ffs5gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 16B
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 05 FEB 2009
3 : Set 3 ADR OFF for BUSS demo. Explain that the lower part of the green band is the
target to fly before extending S/F configuration. The higher part is the target to
retract.
When configurated, target to fly is the middle of the green band.
5 : Clearance: proceed direct to MOU. Insert CAB PRESS EXCESS CAB ALT. Repeat
EMERGENCY DESCENT to proficiency.
ffs5gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 16C
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
OCTTR 0302.04
EMERGENCY DESCENT
First repos to FL350 and run through the procedure without inserting a malfunction.
Next, repos and insert a malfunction. Allow the trainee to perform this several times if neces-
sary to consolidate the procedure.
Finally insert a failure and allow the trainees to fly the whole descent using oxygen masks to
FL100.
COMMON ERRORS
- Rushing procedure.
- Starting approach before completing all procedures.
- Rough handling.
- Use of managed speed on final approach.
- Go around procedure not briefed.
ffs5_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 16D
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
GENERAL
One TRI STUDENT to brief Emergency Descent in full plus slat or flap malfunctions; the other
to brief dual hydraulic failures plus a summary brief for the high speed emergency descent.
The subject matter is complex and will be a test of prioritisation and time management, plus
good simulator handling.
TRI STUDENT weaknesses should be apparent by this stage, so any role-play should be tai-
lored to fit the situation. If there are still weaknesses in knowledge, question deeply in your
role as trainee; if there are weaknesses in training technique, show poor understanding as a
trainee in order to get a better explanation from the TRI STUDENT. It is important to focus on
individual needs at this stage, and to develop where necessary to achieve proficiency in the
final test.
The trainee may fly the session in a reasonably accomplished manner, making only a few
minor mistakes. This will be a surprise to the TRI STUDENTS, given trainee performance to
date, and it will be interesting to see if there is a tendency to over criticise.
MANDATORY EXERCISES:
TUTOR ONLY
ffs5_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 17
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
E
FFS 6
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
FLT NBR A/L 106
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL
CPNY RTE AIBAIB1
ALTN RTE AIBLYS
320 t
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 lb
NOTES
DAY VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE
RWY COND DRY (SID MOU 1N)
AIR COND ON PAX NUMBER : 250
ANTI ICE OFF
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs6.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 18
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
ffs6.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 18A
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Engine failure between V1 and V2.
• Engine-out ILS approach and go around - manually flown.
• Determined by the TRI (E).
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• NIL.
B. NEW EXERCISES :
C. SUPPORT / REFERENCES :
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides
• FCOM
• FCTM
ffs6gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 18B
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
• Items will be specifically allocated by the TRI (E) but will include the following (mandatory)
OR
ffs6gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 18C
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
TEST ITEMS
SCENARIO 1
SCENARIO 2
SCENARIO 3
SCENARIO 4
ffs6_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 18D
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 04 MAY 2008
- TRI STUDENT A conducts the first part of the session (1H30), TRI STUDENT B the sec-
ond part.
De-Brief
- The TRI Examiner will de-brief the TRI STUDENTS and give his final assessment,
- (H = START TIME OF SIM),
- A 4-hour session will be planned for two TRI STUDENTS,
- H - 2:00: TRI Examiner briefs students,
- H - 1.45: Briefing for final assessment session.
ffs6_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 18E
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 05 FEB 2009
OBJECTIVES
Final assessment
TUTOR ONLY
De-briefing A 0:30
B 0:30
SIMULATOR SEATING
TEST
Examiner's Notes
Explanations to STUDENTS
TUTOR ONLY
“Your final session will be with two new candidates that you have been asked to train.
They may have the same names as your original candidates, Capt CRUSTY and/or First
Officer GREEN but you have not met them before today”.
“Captain CRUSTY and/or First Officer GREEN had a problem with their last simulator ses-
sion. Although they received a full briefing on Engine Failure at Take-off from their previ-
ous instructor because of a technical problem with the simulator they were unable to fly the
exercise in the simulator. It has taken a few days to find another simulator session to
replace their original session. You are their new instructor for this session”.
“Your task is to brief Captain CRUSTY and First Officer GREEN for the Engine failure
exercise and to conduct this exercise in the simulator. They will not need a full briefing on
engine failures again but they will need a short briefing on this subject to refresh their
memory”.
“In addition, you will be asked to conduct a full briefing on one other subject and con-
duct the associated exercise in the simulator. This subject is new to Captain CRUSTY
and First Officer GREEN, they have not been briefed before today”.
ffs6_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 18F
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 05 FEB 2009
Content of assessment
Briefing for the test session notified to the student on the day preceding the test. One of the
subjects to be briefed in full, the other nominated exercises in summary. Briefing period will be
30 minutes plus or minus 10 minutes.
Note :
The TRI STUDENT is to use as the basis of his judgement, the trainee's suitability to be pre-
sented to a TRI/TRE for the final phase of training and testing.
The Examiner will select the scenario and advise the TRI STUDENT as to which items he
wishes to be briefed in full and which items may be briefed in summary. In tests conducted by
a TRI examiner with an additional course tutor as the trainee, the examiner should nominate
exercises to be poorly flown and those requiring demonstration. The TRI STUDENT should
not be told which exercises may require demonstration or significant intervention.
TUTOR ONLY
- The TRI STUDENTS will be required to include in their Test Lesson Plan, Engine failure
between V1 and V2 or Engine out ILS to minima and an Engine-out Go-Around. The TRI
STUDENT will be told to expect to demonstrate one of the selected exercises as a result
of trainee's inability to complete the exercise satisfactorily.
- Where possible the Course Tutor will act as trainee, but the TRI Examiner may also fulfil
this function.
- The TRI STUDENTS must have access to all required facilities and material to enable
them to adequately prepare their Lesson Plan.
ffs6_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 18G
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 05 FEB 2009
- Invite questions.
- State the purpose of the test.
- State that the whole exercise will be de-briefed by the Examiner.
- Define the schedule of events.
- Efficient time management in both briefing and conduct of the session (max session time
1.30).
- State that the TRI STUDENT should treat the trainee appropriately, and not as a Course
Tutor.
- State that the TRI STUDENT should demonstrate from a pilot's seat any exercises he/she
TUTOR ONLY
feels appropriate.
- State that the TRI STUDENT is to continue with training to proficiency or until will not ben-
efit from further input.
- State that the other TRI STUDENT is to act as PNF and be competent but passive or
operate the instructor panel as required by the TRI STUDENT under test.
- Brief the candidate to take responsibility for the simulator tech log (DR tool as appropri-
ate) both prior to and after the session.
- Provide a TRI application form.
- Ensure that the TRI STUDENT has the materials and facilities necessary for preparation
of the session.
- Check understanding of the test briefing.
PASS
Complete the Test Report and Examiners Certificate on the TRI Application Form. Brief the
TUTOR ONLY
student that rating privileges cannot be used.
FAIL
Complete the Test Report and Examiners Certificate on TRI Application and Form 252 as
appropriate.
Notes :
For initial TRI Test, keep in mind the TRI STUDENT'S likely lack of training experience
beyond the Core and Type Specific courses.
Completion of the engine-out exercise and the 'demonstration' exercise are mandatory; other-
wise there is no requirement to complete all of the exercises. Apply the principle of quality
rather than quantity.
'Errors' will be typical of those made by trainees and the trainee's progress will reflect the
quality of the instruction given.
ffs6_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.04 Page 18H
A380 L F11
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM INITIAL Issue 05 FEB 2009
For the Test the TRI STUDENT will be asked to construct a simulator session and briefing
based on one of the 4 Test scenarii. The TRI Examiner will determine the order and priority of
items and brief the TRI STUDENT accordingly. The TRI Examiner will also brief the student on
the trainees background and progress to-date. The test begins with a briefing, during which
the TRI STUDENT will brief the trainee for the exercises shown on the test program selected.
The simulator exercise must last no longer than 1hour 30 minutes for each TRI STUDENT.
This is followed by analysis, assessment and feedback of the trainee pilot's performance to
the trainee pilot, and to include recommendations for further training if appropriate.
TUTOR ONLY
TUTOR ONLY
ffs6_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.05 Page 1
A380 L F11
AIRBORNE PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11.05AIRBORNE PHASE
01 - TRAINING FOOTPRINT
This phase MUST be performed on the simulator and aircraft the TRI will be qualified (A380).
DAY 1 DAY 2
FFS FIF FLIGHT FIF
- Right hand seat familiarisation (PF) - Right hand seat familiarisation (PF)
- Base training practice (PNF) - Base training practice (PNF)
- Typical students reactions
(1)
1:30 per trainee
11-05.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.05 Page 2
A380 L F11
AIRBORNE PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11-05.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.05 Page 3
A380 L F11
AIRBORNE PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
E
FFS FIF
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 33R 240/10 13/10 1013 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT TAKE OFF - LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
FLT NBR A/L ID 201 Co-route PAT 33R
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL
CPNY RTE PAT 33R EVENTS: Refer page 4
ALTN RTE AIBLYS
320 t
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 lb
NOTES
DAY VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE
RWY COND DRY (SID 1B)
AIR COND ON PAX NUMBER : 100
ANTI ICE OFF
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
FFSFIF.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.05 Page 4
A380 L F11
AIRBORNE PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
PART A : Operation of the aircraft AS A PILOT (PF) from the right hand seat
PART B : Operation of the aircraft AS AN INSTRUCTOR (PNF) from the right hand seat
• The FFS is treated in with respect to real aircraft being used for base training; i.e. engine failures
are simulatedby setting the thrust lever to idle stop.
• This part is flown with the supervisor instructor playing the student in order to expose the
instructor candidate to typical trainee reactions and problems (error recovery)
INCLUDING :
NORMAL OPERATIONS :
- TAKE-OFF CONFIG WARNING
- OVERCONTROLLING DOWNWIND
- NO RETARD
- HIGH FLARE - LONG FLOAT
- FLAP 3 (GPWS)
- LONG FLARE
- IMMEDIATE GO FROM TOUCH
- TOO HIGH ON APPROACH - NO FLARE
- LANDING GEAR FORGOTTEN
- MISUSE OF RUDDER
- OVERCONTROL IN ROLL DURING FLARE
- INCAPACITATION
= mandatory items
FFSFIF.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.05 Page 4A
A380 L F11
AIRBORNE PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11.07 12.05
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVES
This module is designed to :
• provide familiarisation with the operation of the aircraft from the right hand seat with limited
assistance from the trainee
• familiarise the instructor candidate with the specific techniques of conducting base training,
and to expose him to typical trainee reactions and problems
02 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. BRIEFING
As much as possible, the FFS will be treated as the real aircraft being used for base
training i. e. engine failures are simulated by retarding the respective thrust lever.
Ensuing drills will generally be touch drills.
Of course, genuine failures might occur during training flights. Examples of these will be
introduced using the full capabilities of the simulator and handled using the necessary drills
and check-list procedures.
In the event of a genuine failure, the action must be made clear during the first take-off
briefing i. e. TRI student will assume control of the aircraft clearly calling "I have control"
and expecting the response from the TUTOR acting as trainee "You have control".
The failure then would be handled using the appropriate abnormal/emergency procedures.
b. Use of FMS
Refer to FCTP Base Training chapter : “AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING”
section.
c. Touch and go
Refer to FCTP Base Training chapter : “AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING”
section.
FFSFIFgd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.05 Page 4B
A380 L F11
AIRBORNE PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11.05 12.05
e. Error recovery
During this part the TUTOR will behave as a trainee and introduce common trainee
problems and reactions. The TRI student, while noticing the error, should not simply
highlight the solution but try to analyse the possible reasons behind it.
The TRI student should be aware of the trainee receptive state when pointing out errors.
It could be better to fly the aircraft or use the AP while summarizing a problem so that
the trainee does not have to divide his attention trying to listen and to fly at the same
time. If small errors increase progressively during a session he has to recognize the
level of stress early enough by removing all pressures to prevent trainee's
depression.
• The TRI student must be able to recognize situations when take over becomes neces-
sary.
• In that case, and to avoid side stick interference (dual input) the instinctive disconnect
p/b shall be used.
FFSFIFgd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.05 Page 5
A380 L F11
AIRBORNE PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11.05 12.05
FLIGHT FIF
Minimum flight time : 0h45 / trainee
LH SEAT RH SEAT
DAY GA TG FS NIGHT GA TG FS
Weather : Malfunctions :
1 - TAKE-OFF
2 - VISUAL CIRCUIT (OR INSTRUMENT / RADAR PATTERN ACCORDING TO LOCAL CONDITIONS)
3 - TOUCH AND GO
4 - REPORT DOWNWIND
5 - FROM DOWNWIND
6 - VISUAL CIRCUIT (OR INSTRUMENT / RADAR PATTERN ACCORDING TO LOCAL CONDITIONS)
7 - TOUCH AND GO
11 - TAKE OFF - SIMULATED ENGINE FAILURE (AFTER GEAR RETRACTION AND NOT BEFORE 400’)
12 - INSTRUMENT APPROACH TO REQUIRE MINIMUM DH, MANUAL ONE ENGINE SIMULATED
INOPERATIVE
13 - 1 ENGINE SIMULATED INOPERATIVE GO AROUND FROM REQUIRED DH APPROACH
14 - INCAPACITATION OF LEFT HAND SEAT PILOT
VISUAL CIRCUIT (OR INSTRUMENT/RADAR PATTERN ACCORDING TO LOCAL CONDITIONS)
15 - INSTRUCTOR CANDIDATE TAKE OVER
1 ENGINE SIMULATED INOPERATIVE FULL STOP LANDING
FLIGHTFIF.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.05 Page 6
A380 L F11
AIRBORNE PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11.05 12.05
FLIGHTFIF.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.05 Page 6A
A380 L F11
AIRBORNE PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
12.0511.05 12.05
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVES
This module is designed to put the instructor candidate at ease when operating real aircraft for
base training.
Safety is the top priority of this session. All the potential dangerous situations coming from
trainee’s wrong reactions or problems have been practised in the simulator. Therefore the
supervisor instructor playing the trainee will act as a “good” trainee.
02 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS :
The base training flight has to be conducted in accordance with the relevant
Operation Manual 8.7 Operating procedures, Non Revenue Flight.
B. BRIEFING (1:00)
(Refer to FCTP Base Training chapter : “AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING”)
• The supervisor performs the normal briefing for the training flight, giving special
emphasis to the safety during the flight.
He will train up to proficiency.
Before the flight, it is important to ensure that when the control is handled from one pilot
to the other it is handled over clearly and unambiguously (I have control / You have con-
trol) and the instinctive disconnect p/b is used.
Also the actions in the event of instructor incapacitation should be covered i.e. declare
an emergency and prepare aircraft for an automatic approach and landing (if applicable).
1. During side step manoeuvre with very crisp roll control a possible overcontrol
during this exercise can be anticipated.
CAUTION : Some civil aviation Authorities have defined a minimum height for such a
manoeuvre.
2. Go around from 50 ft :
Similar to a normal go around but taken during the flare.
- Apply power while rotating to arrest the sink rate, call for "Go around flaps".
The main gear may touch the ground during the manoeuvre.
- Check positive climb before retracting gear.
• The TRI student performs the visual circuit and the touch and go briefing.
FLIGHTFIFgd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.05 Page 6B
A380 L F11
AIRBORNE PHASE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11.05 12.05
C. FLIGHT
The airplane shall be operated :
• in compliance with the relevant Flight Operating Manual
(in particular : Chapter 8.7 Non Revenue Flight)
• in compliance with technical and training policy contained in the FCTP Base Training
chapter : “AIRCRAFT FLIGHT TRAINING BRIEFING” section”
FLIGHTFIFgd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.06 Page 1
A380 L F11
AIRBUS PILOT TRANSITION TRAINING
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
11.06AIRBUS PILOT TRANSITION TRAINING
01 - GENERAL
The objective of the course is to deliver the latest Airbus Pilot Transition (APT) course.
02 - TRAINING FOOTPRINT
DAY 1 DAY 2
• APPI module
• Procedure Data Package study
• Briefing guides, laptop, medias
• Closure
11-06.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 11.06 Page 2
A380 L F11
AIRBUS PILOT TRANSITION TRAINING
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
• APT presentation: PPT to present the general philosophy and training philosophy of the
course.
• APT Welcome briefing used to present the APT course, including general presentation,
footprint, documentation and the daily program.
• APT Documentation: show and study the content of a trainee documentation bag for a
standard course:
- Trainee’s booklet.
- DVDs content (trainees DVD 1, DVD 2 and instructor media DVD).
- Task sharing and callouts booklet.
- Action flows booklet.
- A380 Jeppesen Leaflet.
- QRH Leaflet.
- Laptop: OIS presentation.
DAY 2:
• MFTD: demonstration of all possibilities, including shaded area of touch screen, CBT mode,
schematics if available, tutorials (PDP), and IOS familiarization.
• PDP demonstration with "use of tutorial" and study, then practice as trainee and instructor
alternatively, using parts of appropriate lesson plans from ground phase, normal and
abnormal.
• MFTD sessions: Practice as trainer and trainee.
• MFTD: Monitored self-practice of IOS and PDP.
DAY 3:
• APPI: presentation of APPI, including the objectives of APPI, as "making the risk visible",
the user guide study and answering any potential questions.
• PDP: guided self-study for reinforcement of knowledge, with simulated trainees' questions.
• Briefing guides: review all of them following the syllabus, only mention the additional ones,
no study required for APT.
• Laptop: menu of trainee’s laptop.
• Closure: Questions before being an APT instructor, and feedback if any.
11-06.fm
INITIAL TYPE RATING INSTRUCTOR COURSE
12.01 - INTRODUCTION
12-00.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.00 Page 2
A380 L F12
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
12.00
12-00.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.01 Page 1
A380 L F12
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
12.01INTRODUCTION
01 - GENERAL
The objective of the Airbus Pilot Instructor Course is to train to the level of proficiency neces-
sary for the issue of a TRI (A) rating. The course is designed to give adequate training to the
applicant in theoretical knowledge instruction, flight instruction and synthetic flight instruction
in order to instruct for Airbus (see JAR-FCL 1.365).
The privileges of the holder of a TRI rating are to instruct license holders for the issue of a
multi-pilot aero plane type rating, and the instruction required for multi-crew co-operation. The
privileges of the holder of a SFI authorization (Synthetic Flight Instructor) are to carry out syn-
thetic flight instruction for type ratings and the instruction required for multi-crew co-operation.
02 - PREREQUISITES
TRI instructor
Previously qualified TRI on another type.
Type Rating Instructor (TRI) - Multi Pilot Aero planes (MPA) - (JAR-FCL 1.365)
Prior to undertaking the APIC type specific module (transition), an applicant for the extension
of a TRI (MPA) rating to another type shall have:
1.Completed at least 1500 hours flight time as a pilot of multi-pilot aero planes;
2.Completed within the 12 months preceding the application at least 15 route sectors, to
include take-offs and landings as pilot-in-command or co-pilot on the applicable aero plane
type, or a similar type as agreed by the Authority, of which not more than 7 sectors may be
completed in a flight simulator.
3. Completed approved instructor Core Instructor Competencies (Teaching and Learning)
training.
SFI instructor
Prior to undertaking the APIC type specific module (transition), an applicant for the extension
of a SFI (MPA) authorization to another type shall have:
1. Hold or have held a professional flight crew license issued by a JAA Member State or a
non JAR-FCL license acceptable to the Authority.
2. Have completed the simulator content of the applicable type-rating course at an
approved TRTO
3. Have at least 1500 hours flying experience on multi pilot aero planes
4. Have passed a proficiency check in accordance with JAR-FCL 1.240.
5. Have completed within a period of 12 months at least three route sectors as an observer
on the flight deck of the applicable type (1).
6. Successfully completed approved Core Instructor Competencies (Teaching and
Learning) training.
(1) The three route sectors may not be necessarily completed before the beginning of the Air-
bus Pilot Instructor Course and could be done after the full and successful completion of the
Airbus Pilot Instructor Course.
12-01.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.01 Page 2
A380 L F12
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
03 - COURSE DESCRIPTION
Transition TRI
Core course Airborne
Foundation Ground FFS sessions
5 days FFS FIF + Flight
2 days 1 day 4 sessions
(optional) 2days
Transition SFI
Core course
Foundation Ground FFS sessions
5 days
2 days 1 day 4 sessions
(optional)
12-01.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.01 Page 3
A380 L F12
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
04 - COURSE DOCUMENTATION
Trainees will be provided with the following support material:
• Trainee's booklet, including the course syllabus (FCTP)
• Instructor media DVD
• Trainee DVD 1
• Jeppesen charts (for type specific course, can be provided by customers)
• Core course materials will be given during the course
• Laptop including OIS applications
05 - CRITERIA OF PROFICIENCY
a. FOUNDATION MODULE
At the end of the day 2, a written multiple choice examination will be completed.
The minimum level required, to be declared proficient, is never below 80%.
Unsatisfactory examination:
Trainee continues the course until the end of the core module.
A new satisfactory foundation module will be required before type specific module.
b. CORE COURSE
Three boxes are used to record the overall trainee's performance using "Trainee's record" file
(see next pages).
They are quoted "Satisfactory" or "Unsatisfactory".
d. AIRBORNE PHASE
Refer to airborne chapter.
12-01.fm
12-01.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
Trainee s
CORE MODULE sticker
A380
(Refer to relevant PIR when ticked) UNSATISFACTORY
A380
SATISFACTORY
Trainee s Instructor s name
Date (DD/MM/YYYY) Comments*
signature and signature
|____|____|____|____|
Code |____|____|____|
Day 3
PROGRESS
|____|____| / |____|____| / Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
|____|____|____|____|
Code |____|____|____|
Day 5
INTRODUCTION
COURSE COMPLETION
12.01 AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
L F12
FFS 1
|____|____|____|____| Code |____|____|____|
FFS 2
|____|____|____|____| Code |____|____|____|
FFS3
|____|____|____|____| Code |____|____|____|
INTRODUCTION
FFS check
12.01 AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
L F12
12-01.fm
12-01.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
Trainee s
AIRBORNE PHASE sticker
A380
(Refer to relevant PIR when ticked) UNSATISFACTORY
A380
SATISFACTORY
Trainee s Instructor s name
Date (DD/MM/YYYY) Comments*
signature and signature
|____|____|____|____|
Code |____|____|____|
FFS FIF
|____|____| / |____|____| Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
|____|____|____|____|
Code |____|____|____|
FLIGHT FIF
INTRODUCTION
12.01 AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
L F12
12-01.fm
12-01.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
Trainee s
ADDITIONAL TRAINING SESSIONS sticker
A380
UNSATISFACTORY
A380
SATISFACTORY
Trainee s Instructor s name
Session* Date (DD/MM/YYYY) Comments
signature and signature
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
Name
|____|____| / |____|____| / |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|____|__|__|__|
|____|____| / |____|____| /
Code |____|____|____|
|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
|____|____|____|____|
INTRODUCTION
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
|____|____| / |____|____| /
Code |____|____|____|
|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
|____|____|____|____|
12.01 AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
L F12
01 - GENERAL
OBJECTIVES
The successful students will be able to:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be eligible for the issue of :
OR
• Synthetic Flight Instructor
The privileges of the holder of an SFI (A) authorization are to carry out synthetic flight
instruction for type rating, and the instruction required for multi-crew cooperation (see
JAR-FCL 1.261 (d), Appendix 1 to JAR-FCL 1.261 (d) and AMC FCL 1.261 (d)).
For clarity and ease of reference, the following terminology will be used in the course docu-
mentation, and during the conduct of the course:
02 - COURSE PREPARATION
A. BACKGROUND
This course assumes that the TRI STUDENT has a high level of knowledge of aircraft sys-
tems and procedures.
The customer is responsible to ensure that the TRI STUDENT has the potential to complete
the course successfully.
The course is intended for experienced TRI/SFI’s on another type pilots who have
assimilated a high level of technical knowledge and been selected for training as TRI.
It is expected that TRI STUDENTS will spend time preparing for the course in advance.
The course is not intended to make good any shortfall in technical knowledge; those
students who do not prepare are unlikely to succeed.
The function of the course is to introduce and practice the training skills appropriate to type
transition and check/refresher training.
12-04.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 2
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
The course syllabus uses selected elements of exercises from a typical Type Rating Transi-
tion Course and sessions, to provide the environment for the development of instructional
technique.
The TRAINEE will operate from the appropriate pilot seat, with the non-operating TRI STU-
DENT occupying the vacant seat and performing in a competent manner.
The TRAINEE will display a range of abilities and behaviours, consistent with the role adopted
for the session. Errors observed by the TRI STUDENT should be analysed and corrected,
concentrating on the underlying problems encountered by the TRAINEE. The TRI STUDENT
should concentrate on root error causes and deficiencies of technique and not simply offer
advice to correct the error symptom.
C. TRAINING TECHNIQUES
The skills required to deliver type transition and recurrent training include briefing, demonstra-
tion (handling), observation, objective analysis, facilitation, feedback and report writing. The
primary training skills developed in the core instructor competencies (teaching and learning)
course will be reinforced with practical examples.
The TRI STUDENT will be expected to prepare simulator briefing, during which the TRI
TUTOR will examine, selected topics relevant to the simulator session. The TRI STUDENT
will then give a simulator session brief to the trainee. He or she is expected to use all relevant
documentation (OIS, ...).
TRI STUDENTS will be required to prepare lessons plans, adapting the information provided
in the course session
During the sessions the TRI STUDENT will be required to demonstrate procedures and
manoeuvres, to observe the trainee’s performance, to provide analysis/feedback and write a
clear objective trainee’s report. The TRI TUTOR will provide technique training and feedback
for the TRI STUDENT. The course makes extensive use of video recording and playback to
maximise TRI STUDENT learning.
Successful completion of the final check will enable an application for TRI Rating (simulator
only) to be made. The check is a confirmation that the TRI STUDENT has reached the
required level of competence required for rating issue.
12-04.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 3
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 05 FEB 2009
Upon successful completion of the course, a recommendation will be made to the customer
that the TRI STUDENT can be issued with a TRI rating (simulator), subject to any national
licensing authority requirements. Prior to exercising the privileges of this rating, Airbus will rec-
ommend a period of supervision for the successful TRI STUDENT. This period could be any-
thing from the conduct of 1 simulator session under supervision, to a complete transition
course under supervision. The recommendation will be tailored to meet perceived individual
TRI STUDENT needs.It is not mandatory but recommended.
D. SUPPORT
TRI STUDENTS will be provided with the following support material:
The course can be fully customized, in which case items 4 and 6 will be provided by the cus-
tomer
Trainees
The 2 trainees will be role played by the TRI TUTOR/S. They will be:
Trainee A
Captain (tutor first name) Crusty
55 years old. 15,000 flying hours. 6,000 hours flying a B737 300/400/500 or equivalent
Trainee B
First Officer (tutor first name) Green
23 years old. 600 flying hours mainly single and light twin piston. No airline experience.
Completed ELT.
12-04.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 4
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 05 FEB 2009
The next 4 days follow the format of 2 hours of briefing and classroom work for the 2 TRI
STUDENTS, followed by a 4 hour full flight simulator (FFS) session, and finishing with a one-
hour de-briefing and re-briefing for the following day.
Each TRI STUDENT will in turn, deliver 30 minutes of briefings to the trainee. The main brief-
ing topic should require 20 minutes coverage, with the other topic requiring 10 minutes.
The TRI TUTOR will analyse these briefings and provide feedback to the TRI STUDENT prior
to the Sim session.
Each half of the Sim Session (1:30) will be a practical lesson based on these briefings. The
TRI STUDENT will plan the session and order of events as appropriate. The TRAINEE will fly
the session as briefed; it may be obvious that one or more of the items is causing significant
problems to the TRAINEE, necessitating a demonstration from the TRI STUDENT. The exer-
cises are continued until either the TRAINEE reaches a satisfactory standard, or the TRI
TUTOR decides to terminate that particular item and to move on to the next.
On completion of the simulator exercise, TRI STUDENT will debrief the TRAINEE, before writ-
ing handover notes. The TRI TUTOR will then debrief the TRI STUDENT.
For this, TRI STUDENTS will be provided with mock trainee files.
The emphasis throughout will be on quality of instruction, the accuracy of analysis, and the
relevance of any remedial action recommended by the TRI STUDENT, rather than amount of
material covered.
12-04.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 5
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 05 FEB 2009
The list below covers the major items to be covered during each simulator session:
Quick start, engine failure after V1, engine relight, reposition FL350, emergency
descent, HYD G+ Y SYS PRESS LO, flapless landing.
FFS 3 Crosswind takeoff, ELEC EMER CONFIG. Simulator Reset.
F. SIMULATOR SEATING
There will be 2 TRI TUTORS for each day. The role-play will be split with one TRI TUTOR
allocated to each TRAINEE (A or B) The simulator sessions will be divided so that the TRI
TUTOR for the session occupies the PF seat, e.g.
For FFS 2, 3 :
The TRI STUDENT conducting the session occupies the IOS.
The other TRI STUDENT occupies the PNF seat
Normally each TRI STUDENT will complete 2 consecutive sessions with one TRAINEE (A OR
B)
Normally the order of events for the TRI STUDENTS will reverse each day, e.g. for FFS 1, TRI
STUDENT A will brief first and act as the TRI for the first part of the session, and B for the sec-
ond. On the following day TRI STUDENT B will brief first and act as TRI for the first part of the
session, and so on.
12-04.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 6
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
G. ASSESSMENT
TRI STUDENT progress will be continually assessed throughout the course, and he or she
will only be presented for the Final Check if the Course TRI TUTOR is confident that the
required standard will be achieved.
If there is doubt as about successful outcome of the course, the TRI STUDENT will be
advised and any necessary remedial action discussed.
For the Final Check the TRI STUDENT will be asked to construct a simulator session and
briefing based on one of the 4 Test Scenarii. The test will begin with a briefing for the exer-
cises shown on the test scenario. The simulator exercise will last no longer than 1hour 30 min-
utes for each TRI STUDENT. This will be followed by analysis, assessment and feedback of
the trainee’s performance, including recommendations for further training as appropriate.
DAY 1 (ground)
DAY 2 DAY 3
DAY 4 DAY 5
12-04.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 6A
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
11.01INTRODUCTION
DAY 1 (Ground)
During introductory discussions ensure the TRI STUDENTS are both prepared to present an
Airbus fly by wire accident
Ensure TRI STUDENTS have all the required materials. Escort them as necessary to obtain
the instructor laptop.
TUTOR ONLY
Using the Introduction Section, present a short briefing outlining the content and philosophy of
the course:
Pre-requisites (knowledge and experience)
Talk about assumptions and the need for a high level of technical knowledge
Course Objective
Be concise and tell them the objective is to prepare them so that they can adapt to any sylla-
bus and have the basic tools needed to brief, operate the simulator, observe, teach, demon-
strate and debrief.
JAR-FCL Requirements
Briefly introduce the regulation or adapt to local regulations for TRI
Course Method and the use of role-play
Describe the purpose of role-play, for the TUTOR to control the instruction and ensure TRI
STUDENTS exposure to different types of trainee.
TUTOR ONLY
Describe each role and ensure TRI STUDENTS understand
TUTOR PF
TUTOR IOS
TRI STUDENT
TRAINEE
Facilitate a brief discussion on the relative challenges that each trainee may present use of
video recording and playback.
Explain the purpose and use. Ensure the TRI STUDENTS know the tapes will be destroyed
Video will only be used until briefing skills reach the required standard
day1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 6B
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
STUDENTS will not be entered for the test unless there is a high probability of success.
Ask the trainees to write their hopes and concerns (what they do want, what they do not want)
about the course and then collect them explaining that they will be used in the final part of the
course
Hand out post it notes each (2 colours) – (used in final collective debrief)
EFFECTIVE TRAINING
“Think back to who was a good instructor, have their name in mind. Identify 2 or 3 character-
istics and write them down, individually.”
TUTOR ONLY
“Think back to who was a poor instructor, have their name in mind. Identify 2 or 3 character-
istics and write them down, individually.”
Tell the TRI student that this defines effective instruction/ineffective training and appropriate/
inappropriate behavior.
day1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 6C
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
ACCIDENT PRESENTATIONS
Student Presentations
A review an human factors related fly-by-wire Airbus accidents. The presentation should not
exceed the allotted time and may include any available tools. e.g:
-White Board
-Flip Chart
-PowerPoint
TUTOR ONLY
Information is available from a variety of sources, including : http://aviation-safety.net.
Presentation material must be prepared solely by the TRI STUDENTS.
ABNORMAL PROCEDURES
EXERCISE (1:00)
Explain to the TRI STUDENTS that one of the main challenges of training is to take complex
topics and present them in a simple and uncomplicated manner.
TUTOR ONLY
Tell them they have 30 minutes in which to prepare a short 10-minute presentation on one of
the following subjects:
- FBW engine failure above V1, rotation technique, and initial climb.
- FBW crosswind landing technique, or GPWS recovery.
The presentation should be directed towards a pilot with no technical knowledge of the air-
craft, as though he/she is part of a team assessing the potential purchase of a FBW Airbus.
Emphasis should be on practical application and the operational advantages of the sys-
tem, plus detailed information on flying techniques.
Allow them the use of any available material, including extracts from the FCTM.
day1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 6D
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
day1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 7
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 1
E
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
33R 330/10 CAVOK 20/10 QNH 1010 QFE 981 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
TRI STUDENT A
FLT NBR A/L 101
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL INIT GATE
FFS SAFETY
CPNY RTE AIBAIB1 1 - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT
PREPARATION
ALTN RTE AIBLYS
2 - ENGINE START / AFTER START
CRZ FL FL 70 CRZ TEMP -7°C 3 - TAXI
0:50 4 - TAKE OFF v v
CI 90 TROPO 36090 5 - CLIMB FL 110 v v v
6 - FLIGHT CONTROL LAW DEMO v
TRIP WIND HD 15
7 - DES - STAR v v v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD 8 - NON PRECISION APPROACH VOR v v v v
DME (FLS)
385 t 65 t 1:50 9 - LANDING
GW FOB
847 000 lb 143 000 lb
TRI STUDENT B
320 t
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 lb 2:10 INIT HOLDING POINT
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs1.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 8
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
ffs1.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 8A
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Use of SOP’s task sharing throughout a normal flight sequence
• Handling techniques at takeoff and landing
• Study of Flight Control Laws including high and low speed protections
• Study of A/THR and side stick logics
• Study of ILS RAW DATA
• Study of visual pattern
• Study of windshear recovery at takeoff
• Non Precision Approach: flying technique below MDA
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• Cockpit preparation using aicraft equipments in a real environment.
B. NEW EXERCISES:
• Cockpit preparation
• Seat adjustment, armrest, lights
• Oxygen masks
• Audio: hand mike, headset, RMP, ACP.
• Taxi
• NWS, brake check, flight control check, take off side stick position, rotation technique
• Flight Control Laws
• Sidestick logic
• Auto Thrust logic
• Raw Data ILS approach
• Managed Non Precision Approach
• Windshear
C. SUPPORT / REFERENCES:
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides
• FCOM
• FCTM
ffs1gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 8B
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
6 : VV design
- Explain that whatever the size and the color, VV indicates always the same thing /
the track (TRK) and the flight path angle (FPA).
- The message to be adressed about size and color is :
• Size means FD status
• small : FD ON follow FD
• big : FD OFF follow VV
• Color means
• black = HDG / VS
• green = TRK / FPA
Protections
Trainee 1 performs all the protections exercices in clean configuration.
Trainee 2 performs only the high angle of attack protection in landing
configuration.
AP OFF - FD ON - A/THR OFF
- Roll: speed around 280 kts
• From the above ask the pilot to practice 45° bank angle turns
• Ask the pilot to increase bank angle to the maximum (67°)
• Emphasize that the max bank angle corresponds to the max G load (2.5 G),
displayed on SD
ffs1gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 8C
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
13 : Autothrust.
Disconnect / reengagement FMA - ECAM.
Demonstrate that thrust is available beyond CLB detent.
ffs1gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 8D
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
ffs1gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 8E
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
COCKPIT PREPARATION
Detailed information on preparing the cockpit for departure is to be found in FCOM and in the
FCTM. For the first session, the trainees perform a preliminary and a complete cockpit prep-
aration. Initially you can help your trainees when the configuration is incorrect but after a few
sessions they should be able to do it themselves.
Try to focus your attention on the trainees and keep the IOS inputs as simple as possible
Create realism by ensuring the aircraft is on the gate, the cockpit is correctly set, doors are
open.
Set the environment according to the session guide.
Try to simulate the normal sequence of events, e.g. fuel loading, pax boarding, doors closing,
final load information.
Task sharing and areas of responsibility may need to be clear explanation. Encourage ensure
good crew communication and crosschecking.
LANDING
It is an important concept that the aircraft should be aligned with the centreline of the runway
during the landing.
If the trainees have problems landing, check they are looking at the far end of the runway dur-
ing the flare
ffs1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 8F
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
Typical briefing
Typical debriefing
ffs1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 8G
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
GENERAL
FFS 1 session is supposed to reflect the first FFS session (normal operation) of a transition
course.
Ensure the TRI STUDENTS have an opportunity to ask questions before starting their brief-
ings, to clear up any uncertainties.
Arrange the video (if used) so you can see the white board and student. Try to make a note of
TUTOR ONLY
any interesting aspects of behaviour or body language. At this stage play close attention to
style and delivery as well as technical content.
Explain to the TRI STUDENTS that taxi, takeoff, visual pattern, landing, windshear, flying
technique below MDA (FLS) exercises are supposed to have been briefed.
The briefing may overrun the planned time of 30 minutes. Allow a small overrun for this ses-
sion but emphasise to the TRI STUDENTS the need for good time management. The stu-
dents will almost certainly be nervous.
Technical knowledge in this area should be good, but the TRI STUDENTS will need to think
carefully about the mechanics of demonstrating FBW protections. They have guidance in the
session preparation notes. If things don’t work perfectly in the simulator, allow them some time
to think around the problem before intervening.
This is an important session for the students to learn the importance of matching their words
to simulator behaviour.
If you suspect a lack of knowledge in what should be familiar areas, probe during the briefing,
TUTOR ONLY
session and debriefing.
If the knowledge is assessed to be poor, remind the TRI STUDENT/S to be very thorough in
their preparation. Tell them that a high level of technical knowledge is expected and it will be
constantly tested particularly in the latter part of the course.
The TRI STUDENTS must begin work on their briefing for the conduct of FFS 2. This session
deals with engines failures.
ffs1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 8H
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
FFS 2 consists of Engine Failure procedures, simple ECAM procedures. The TRI STU-
DENTS should be told to assemble their own session to cover the syllabus of instrument
approaches and simple failures, and to consolidate previous lessons. They should have iden-
tified the trainee’s weaknesses and will wish to correct them.
In Trainee role-play, one character is the Captain, reluctant to accept FBW and the Airbus phi-
losophy. The other character is a new inexperienced co-pilot. Both make typical errors. Swap
trainees after FFS 2, this will ensure that the TRI STUDENTS have exposure to both charac-
ters and seats.
TUTOR ONLY
TUTOR ONLY
ffs1_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 9
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 2
E
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
33R 330/10 5000 RA OVC 600 8/6 QNH 1010 QFE 981 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
TRI STUDENT B
FLT NBR A/L 102
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL INIT HOLDING POINT
E
INIT TAKE OFF - LFZZ 06
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272 MTOW 569 T - ZFW 360 T FOB 209 T
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
16 - RTO
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
3:55 17 - EMERGENCY EVACUATION
V1 122 TOGA V1 125 TOGA E
Briefing Topics
VR 126 v FLEX 56 VR 126 v FLEX 56
TRI STUDENT B
V2 132 DERATED V2 132 DERATED Engine failure after V1
ILS approach and GO AROUND one engine out
FLAPS 3 THS FOR FLAPS 3 THS FOR
TRI STUDENT A
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF 2 engines inop approach
LFZZ 06 / MTOW 569 T Rejected takeoff - EMER EVAC
V1 126 v TOGA V1 TOGA
ffs2.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 10
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
ffs2.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 10A
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
Study of:
• Engine failure after V1
• ILS one engine out and go around
• Two engines out approach and landing
• Rejected take off
• EMER EVAC
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• Cockpit preparation
B. NEW EXERCISES :
• One engine out ILS
• One engine out Go around
• One engine out Landing and two engines Inop on same wing
• Rejected take off and emergency evacuation
C. SUPPORT / REFERENCES :
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides
• FCOM
• FCTM
ffs2gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 10B
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04
3,10 : Engine failure after V1 (with damage or relight unsuccessful) until acceptable
proficiency. If not, TRI STUDENT demonstration.
ffs2gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 10C
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04
NON-PRECISION APPROACHES
Common Errors:
- Raw data information not monitored closely throughout approach.
- NAV accuracy not confirmed or checked.
- TO waypoint validity not checked on ND.
- Incomplete or rushed briefing.
- Aircraft descent preparation late.
- Go around altitude set incorrectly.
Common Errors:
- Over rotation on take off leading to speed below V2.
- FMA changes not announced.
- ß Target not fully centred.
- Not trimming the rudder.
- ECAM non-reversible actions carried out without proper crew confirmation.
- Missed Approach procedure or ATC instructions not accurately followed.
- Poor maintenance and monitoring of required track.
- Lack of task sharing discipline during manual flight (FCU actions).
- Not rotating to correct pitch attitude on go-around.
- Not aware of MSA.
REJECTED TAKE-OFF
Common Errors:
- Disarming of auto brake due to instinctive manual braking.
- ATC and / or Cabin crew not informed.
- Reversers remain engaged after aircraft stop.
- Omitting to set parking brake on.
- Inability to use mechanical seat controls once the aircraft no longer has a source of AC
power.
ffs2_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 10D
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
For this session the role-play may develop as the students become more comfortable in the
environment. Respond to the instruction you receive. Give each student a least 2 items to
debrief.
TUTOR ONLY
It is likely that these difficulties will cause disruption to the session. The TRI STUDENTS must
retain control and determine how to overcome the problems. The TRI STUDENTS may be
keen to demonstrate from a seat; allow this if they suggest it. They will need some help in set-
ting the simulator.
Possible errors:
- Late configuration, high on the profile, chasing from above
- Not selecting or monitoring raw data
- Poor visual transition at MDA, FD remain on and ‘ducks under’ the slope
There should be plenty to debrief. Make sure the TRI STUDENTS are prioritising correctly,
and have a clear strategy of the remedial training that may be needed.
handle the trainee. Don’t forget the emphasis on training to proficiency; encourage the TRI
STUDENTS to give praise as well as criticism and to end the debrief on a positive note.
REVIEW
The course tutor/s should review the TRI STUDENTS progress at this point. Be honest about
progress to-date; give praise where appropriate; ensure that where there is doubt about
progress there will be a further review after each day. The course is very time limited and
there is little scope for remedial training.
ffs2_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 11
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 3
E
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
33R 330/10 5000 OVC 500 8/6 QNH 1003 QFE 974 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
TRI STUDENT A
FLT NBR A/L 103
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL INIT HOLDING POINT
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs3.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 12
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
ffs3.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 12A
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 05 FEB 2009
02.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Study of emergency descent
• Study of HYD G + Y SYS PRESS LO
• Study of ELEC EMER CONFIG
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• Crosswind Takeoff
• Engine failure after V1
• Engine Relight
• TRI Test items (FFS 4)
B. NEW EXERCISES:
• Emergency descent
• HYD G + Y SYS PRESS LO
• ELEC EMER CONFIG
C. SUPPORT / REFERENCES :
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides, Flt Ops Briefing Notes/Landing techniques.
• FCOM
• FCTM
ffs3gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 12B
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
5 : At FL 350 insert CAB PRESS EXCESS CAB ALT (Explosive decompression window
blown out).
At FL 100 or MSA, end of exercise.
Restore all systems.
ffs3gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 12C
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
COMMON ERRORS
• ECAM HANDLING
- No de-selection of manually selected system page when no longer required.
- Clearing action without crosscheck.
- STATUS page reviewed at the wrong time.
• EMERGENCY DESCENT
- Oxygen Mask not fitted prior to descent.
- Rushed procedure.
- Communication not established.
- Wrong FCU selections.
- FMA not checked.
- Speed brake not extended.
- Autopilot / Autothrust disengaged.
- Descent below MSA.
- Max / Appropriate speed not achieved.
- Oxygen mask selectors left at 100 %.
- ATC not advised.
ffs3_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 12D
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 05 FEB 2009
GENERAL
FFS 3 gives the TRI STUDENTS the opportunity to conduct some more complex exercises
that they may not have recent experienced (unlike the normal recurrent training exercises).
In order to successfully brief, conduct, and debrief the Double Hydraulic Failure and Emer-
gency Electrical Configuration the prospective TRI’s will have had to perform significant “self-
study” and briefing preparation.
The briefings should be concise and assume that the trainees have prepared for the session
with self-study. The TRI’s should be encouraged to question the trainees to ascertain their
TUTOR ONLY
technical knowledge.
The simulation should be conducted in a realistic Line Orientated Simulation (LOS), however
it may be appropriate to freeze the simulator during the exercise to enable the trainees to
observe the effects of the failure and its associated procedure.
Sufficient time should be left at the end of the details to review the requirements of the TRI
test (FFS 4).
Prior to releasing the candidate for the test, the Tutor should be confident that they have
reached the required standard to pass. Otherwise additional training may be requested.
final test.
The trainee may fly the session in a reasonably accomplished manner, making only a few
minor mistakes. This will be a surprise to the TRI STUDENTS, given trainee performance to
date, and it will be interesting to see if there is a tendency to over criticise.
ffs3_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 13
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
FFS 4
E
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
FLT NBR A/L 104
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL
CPNY RTE AIBAIB1
ALTN RTE AIBLYS
TRIP WIND HD 15
320 t
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 lb
NOTES
DAY VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE
RWY COND DRY (SID MOU 1N)
AIR COND ON PAX NUMBER : 250
ANTI ICE : E
E Briefing Topics
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
TRI STUDENT A
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
TRI STUDENT B
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
As required by the TRI Examiner
VR FLEX VR FLEX
Each TRI STUDENT will complete individual lesson plans
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs4.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 14
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
ffs4.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 14A
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• Engine failure between V1 and V2.
• Engine-out ILS approach and go around - manually flown.
• Determined by the TRI (E).
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. REVIEW :
• NIL.
B. NEW EXERCISES:
C. SUPPORT / REFERENCES :
• DVD 1 : FFS briefing guides
• FCOM
• FCTM
ffs4gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 14B
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
• Items will be specifically allocated by the TRI (E) but will include the following (mandatory)
OR
ffs4gd.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 14C
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.04
TEST ITEMS
SCENARIO 1
SCENARIO 2
SCENARIO 3
SCENARIO 4
ffs4_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 14D
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 04 MAY 2008
- TRI Student A conducts first 1hr 30 min session, TRI Student B the second.
De-Brief
- The TRI Examiner will de-brief the TRI Students and give his final assessment,
- (H = START TIME OF SIM),
- A 4-hour session will be planned for two TRI Students,
- H - 2:00: TRI Examiner briefs students,
- H - 1.45: Briefing for final assessment session.
ffs4_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 14E
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 05 FEB 2009
OBJECTIVES
Final assessment
TUTOR ONLY
B 0:30
SIMULATOR SEATING
TEST
Examiner's Notes
Explanations to STUDENTS
TUTOR ONLY
“Your final session will be with two new candidates that you have been asked to train.
They may have the same names as your original candidates, Capt CRUSTY and/or First
Officer GREEN but you have not met them before today”.
“Captain CRUSTY and/or First Officer GREEN had a problem with their last simulator ses-
sion. Although they received a full briefing on Engine Failure at Take-off from their previ-
ous instructor because of a technical problem with the simulator they were unable to fly the
exercise in the simulator. It has taken a few days to find another simulator session to
replace their original session. You are their new instructor for this session”.
“Your task is to brief Captain CRUSTY and First Officer GREEN for the Engine failure
exercise and to conduct this exercise in the simulator. They will not need a full briefing on
engine failures again but they will need a short briefing on this subject to refresh their
memory”.
“In addition, you will be asked to conduct a full briefing on one other subject and con-
duct the associated exercise in the simulator. This subject is new to Captain CRUSTY
and First Officer GREEN, they have not been briefed before today”.
ffs4_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 14F
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 05 FEB 2009
Content of assessment
Briefing for the test session notified to the student on the day preceding the test. One of the
subjects to be briefed in full, the other nominated exercises in summary. Briefing period will be
30 minutes plus or minus 10 minutes.
Note :
The TRI student is to use as the basis of his judgement, the trainee's suitability to be pre-
sented to a TRI/TRE for the final phase of training and testing.
The Examiner will select the scenario and advise the TRI Student as to which items he wishes
to be briefed in full and which items may be briefed in summary. In tests conducted by a TRI
examiner with an additional course tutor as the trainee, the examiner should nominate exer-
cises to be poorly flown and those requiring demonstration. The TRI Student should not be
TUTOR ONLY
- The TRI Students will be required to include in their Test Lesson Plan, Engine failure
between V1 and V2 or Engine out ILS to minima and an Engine-out Go-Around. The TRI
Student will be told to expect to demonstrate one of the selected exercises as a result of
trainee's inability to complete the exercise satisfactorily.
- Where possible the Course Tutor will act as trainee, but the TRI Examiner may also fulfil
this function.
- The TRI Students must have access to all required facilities and material to enable them
to adequately prepare their Lesson Plan.
ffs4_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 14G
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 05 FEB 2009
- Invite questions.
- State the purpose of the test.
- State that the whole exercise will be de-briefed by the Examiner.
- Define the schedule of events.
- Efficient time management in both briefing and conduct of the session (max session time
1.30).
- State that the TRI Student should treat the trainee appropriately, and not as a Course
Tutor.
- State that the TRI Student should demonstrate from a pilot's seat any exercises he/she
feels appropriate.
TUTOR ONLY
- State that the TRI Student is to continue with training to proficiency or until will not benefit
from further input.
- State that the other TRI Student is to act as PNF and be competent but passive or oper-
ate the instructor panel as required by the TRI Student under test.
- Brief the candidate to take responsibility for the simulator tech log (DR tool as appropri-
ate) both prior to and after the session.
- Provide a TRI application form.
- Ensure that the TRI Student has the materials and facilities necessary for preparation of
the session.
- Check understanding of the test briefing.
PASS
TUTOR ONLY
Complete the Test Report and Examiners Certificate on the TRI Application Form. Brief the
student that rating privileges cannot be used.
FAIL
Complete the Test Report and Examiners Certificate on TRI Application and Form 252 as
appropriate.
Notes :
For initial TRI Test, keep in mind the TRI student's likely lack of training experience beyond
the Core and Type Specific courses.
Completion of the engine-out exercise and the 'demonstration' exercise are mandatory; other-
wise there is no requirement to complete all of the exercises. Apply the principle of quality
rather than quantity.
'Errors' will be typical of those made by trainees and the trainee's progress will reflect the
quality of the instruction given.
ffs4_tutor.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 12.04 Page 14H
A380 L F12
TYPE SPECIFIC MODULE
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM TRANSITION Issue 05 FEB 2009
For the Test the TRI student will be asked to construct a simulator session and briefing based
on one of the 4 Test scenarii. The TRI Examiner will determine the order and priority of items
and brief the TRI student accordingly. The TRI Examiner will also brief the student on the
trainees background and progress to-date. The test begins with a briefing, during which the
TRI student will brief the trainee for the exercises shown on the test program selected. The
simulator exercise must last no longer than 1hour 30 minutes for each TRI student. This is fol-
lowed by analysis, assessment and feedback of the trainee pilot's performance to the trainee
pilot, and to include recommendations for further training if appropriate.
TUTOR ONLY
TUTOR ONLY
ffs4_tutor.fm
INITIAL TYPE RATING INSTRUCTOR COURSE
13.01 - INTRODUCTION
13-00.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 13.00 Page 2
A380 L F13
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
13.00
13-00.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 13.01 Page 3
A380 L F13
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
13.01INTRODUCTION
01 - GENERAL
The objective of the Airbus Pilot Instructor Course is to train to the level of proficiency neces-
sary for the issue of a TRI (A) rating. The course is designed to give adequate training to the
applicant in theoretical knowledge instruction, flight instruction and synthetic flight instruction
in order to instruct for Airbus (see JAR-FCL 1.365).
The privileges of the holder of a TRI rating are to instruct license holders for the issue of a
multi-pilot aero plane type rating, and the instruction required for multi-crew co-operation. The
privileges of the holder of a SFI authorization (Synthetic Flight Instructor) are to carry out syn-
thetic flight instruction for type ratings and the instruction required for multi-crew co-operation.
02 - PREREQUISITES
TRI instructor
The objective is to qualify instructors who have already performed an APIC course (Initial or
Transition) on one Airbus Fly by wire and wants to transition to another Airbus Fly by wire
type.
Type Rating Instructor (TRI) - Multi Pilot Aero planes (MPA) - (JAR-FCL 1.365)
Prior to undertaking the APIC Cross Instructor Qualification, an applicant for the extension of
a TRI (MPA) rating to another type shall have:
1.Completed at least 1500 hours flight time as a pilot of multi-pilot aero planes;
2.Completed within the 12 months preceding the application at least 15 route sectors, to
include take-offs and landings as pilot-in-command or co-pilot on the applicable aero plane
type, or a similar type as agreed by the Authority, of which not more than 7 sectors may be
completed in a flight simulator.
3. Completed approved instructor Core Instructor Competencies (Teaching and Learning)
training.
SFI instructor
Prior to undertaking the APIC type specific module (transition), an applicant for the extension
of a SFI (MPA) authorization to another type shall have:
1. Hold or have held a professional flight crew license issued by a JAA Member State or a
non JAR-FCL license acceptable to the Authority.
2. Have completed the simulator content of the applicable type-rating course at an
approved TRTO
3. Have at least 1500 hours flying experience on multi pilot aero planes
4. Have passed a proficiency check in accordance with JAR-FCL 1.240.
5. Successfully completed approved Core Instructor Competencies (Teaching and
Learning) training.
13-01.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 13.01 Page 4
A380 L F13
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
FFS check
1 day
04 - COURSE DOCUMENTATION
Trainees will be provided with the following support material:
• Trainee's booklet, including the course syllabus (FCTP)
• Instructor media DVD
• QRH booklet
• Trainee DVD 1
• Jeppesen charts (for type specific course, can be provided by customers)
• In the event the laptop is needed, the SFI / TRI will provide their own one
13-01.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
Trainee s
CROSS INSTRUCTOR QUALIFICATION sticker
A380
A380
FFS check
INTRODUCTION
13.01 AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
L F13
Page 5
13-01.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
13-01.fm
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 04
Trainee s
AIRBORNE PHASE sticker
A380
SATISFACTORY
Trainee s Instructor s name
Date (DD/MM/YYYY) Comments*
signature and signature
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
|____|____|____|____|
Code |____|____|____|
FFS FIF
|____|____| / |____|____| Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
|____|____|____|____|
Code |____|____|____|
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT FIF
13.01 AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE
L F13
Including:
- Welcome
- Role play explanation (refer to 11.04 page 2 to 4)
- Documentation review, FCTP, DVD, Airport charts, QRH, OIS, FCOM
- FFS check preparation (refer to 11.04 page 18A to 18D)
- Questions and Answers
02 - FFS CHECK
For all the session contents and details refer to type specific course. This session is strictly
identical to FFS 6 chapter 11.04 page 17.
13-02.fm
AIRBUS PILOT INSTRUCTOR COURSE 13.02 Page 2
A380 L F13
CROSS INSTRUCTOR QUALIFICATION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
13-02.fm
LOW VISIBILITY OPERATIONS
18.01 - INTRODUCTION
18-00.fm
LOW VISIBILITY OPERATIONS 18.00 Page 2
A380 L F18
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
18.00
18-00.fm
LOW VISIBILITY OPERATIONS 18.01 Page 1
A380 L F18
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
18.01INTRODUCTION
01 - GENERAL
The Low Visibility Operations (L.V.O.) course provides the specific training required to pre-
pare trainees to practice CAT II / III approaches and low visibility take-off as allowed by local
Authorities. The training is based on JAR-OPS 1.450
02 - COURSE DURATION
03 - COURSE PREPARATION
The CBT self study is available on the trainee’s DVD and must be completed before the
L.V.O. session. The trainee will sign this sheet and provide it to the instructor during the
briefing.
Date :
Signed :
18-01.fm
LOW VISIBILITY OPERATIONS 18.01 Page 2
A380 L F18
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
18.01
18-01.fm
LOW VISIBILITY OPERATIONS 18.02 Page 1
A380 L F18
TRAINING FOOTPRINT
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
18.02TRAINING FOOTPRINT
A. STANDARD CREW
.
DAY 1 DAY 2
18-02.fm
LOW VISIBILITY OPERATIONS 18.02 Page 2
A380 L F18
TRAINING FOOTPRINT
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
18.02
18-02.fm
LOW VISIBILITY OPERATIONS 18.03 Page 1
A380 L F18
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
E
L.V.O. FFS - TRAINEE 1
WEATHER
270°/5 kt Visi/Ceiling : Per syllabus Temp 2 AIRLINE OPERATIONAL MINIMUM :
Dew Point 1 QNH 1020 QFE 991
LOW VISIBILITY TAKE-OFF
ACTIVE / INIT
FLT NBR A/L ID 181 APPROACH : CAT II CAT III
FFS1.fm
LOW VISIBILITY OPERATIONS 18.03 Page 2
A380 L F18
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
FFS1.fm
LOW VISIBILITY OPERATIONS 18.03 Page 2A
A380 L F18
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
18.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE
• To complete L.V.O. training so that the crew reaches the required level of proficiency for
CAT II / III approaches and low visibility take-off operations.
02 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. INTRODUCE
• CAT II / III approaches and low visibility take-off training.
B. EXERCICES / REFERENCES :
• AUTOFLIGHT LIMITATIONS
• VISUAL SEGMENT
• TASK SHARING / PRECISION APPROACHES
• REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
C. SUPPORT
• FCOM
• Getting to grips with CAT II / III on DVD 1
FFS1gd.fm
LOW VISIBILITY OPERATIONS 18.03 Page 2B
A380 L F18
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
The minimum specified on the syllabus are compliant with J.A.A requirements.
For all exercises, the instructor must adapt RVR and cloud base settings to the
Airline operational minimum when they are different. In this case they must be
mentioned on the syllabus page, in the appropriate box.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
1 : - Ensure that the trainee does not waste time in setting-up prior to start
- An appropriate take-off alternate should be inserted in the SEC F/PLAN.
2, 23 : - Brief the crew that visibility will be reduced to zero on the take-off run to illustrate
effectiveness of the YAW-BAR.
(NOTE : YAW-BAR will appear only if the ILS/LOC is available for the same RWY
direction)
- Ask the PF to continue T/O for training purposes, using the YAW-BAR only.
3, 19 : - Ensure that the crew can give a concise CAT II / III approach briefing.
- Stress task sharing, weather minima, crew qualification, alternate planning, fuel
requirements, approach ban, aircraft and airfield serviceability, SOP, flight deck
lighting, etc...
- Check crew seating position
- Autobrake 2 or 3 is recommended
- Check autoland limitations.
- The crew must check autoland function prior to approach (CAT 2, CAT 3 SINGLE,
CAT 3 DUAL on FMA).
- The crew must acknowledge all FMA changes.
- The crew must call and acknowledge approach STD call-out.
- Check that Go Around ALT is properly set.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
FFS1gd.fm
LOW VISIBILITY OPERATIONS 18.03 Page 2C
A380 L F18
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
If the failure lasts longer than 7 seconds, the APs disengage and the FDs revert to
HDG-V/S or TRK-FPA mode. Below 200 ft RA, the autoland warning will appear.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
(transmitter or receivers),
or
• the difference between both radio altimeter indications is greater than 15 feet.
- Insert loss of radio altimeters, SFD (Standby Flight Display) and instrument failures.
8 : - Insert loss of LOC signal below 200 ft and visual minima zero.
- The crew should perform a go around when AUTOLAND warning is flashing
FFS1gd.fm
LOW VISIBILITY OPERATIONS 18.03 Page 2D
A380 L F18
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 03 NOV 2007
9 : - Insert auto thrust failures above 1 000ft. Check landing capability on FMA
which revert to CAT 2. Time permitting, crew should confirm capability with the
required equipment for CAT II and CAT III on (ref TBD) and continue approach in
CAT 2 capability.
16, 32: During rejected take-off, reduce visibility to zero and ensure that PF is using the
YAW BAR guidance.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
FFS1gd.fm
REFRESHER COURSE
23.01 - INTRODUCTION
23-00.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.00 Page 2
A380 L F23
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
23.00
23-00.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.01 Page 1
A380 L F23
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
23.01INTRODUCTION
Interruption Up to 22 to 43 days 2 to 3 3 to 6 6 to 9 9 to 12
Above
length : 21 days(1) 42 days to 2 months months months months months
Refresher
New Type
course to be None REF # 1(2) REF # 2 REF # 3 REF # 4 REF # 5 REF # 6
Rating
performed :
+ Base Training
a. Case 1 :
Base aircraft not flown during the following periods (i. e. pilot not current on base
aircraft at time of Base Training) :
Interruption Up to 2 to 3 3 to 6 6 to 9 9 to 12 12 to 18 18 to 24
Above
length : 2 months months months months months months months
Refresher
New Type
course to be None REF # 1(2) REF # 2 REF # 3 REF # 4 REF # 5 REF # 6
Rating
performed :
+ Base Training
(1) The period of 21 days may be extended to a maximum of 1 month by issue of a training
deviation.
(2) Refresher # 1 can be performed in either the simulator or the aircraft ; if performed in
the aircraft, the Training Captain must refer to the Refresher Flight syllabus
23-01.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.01 Page 2
A380 L F23
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
23.01
b. Case 2 :
Pilot current on base aircraft at the time of Base Training :
Interruption Up to 6 to 9 9 to 12 12 to 18 18 to 24
Above
length : 6 months months months months months
Refresher
New Type
course to be None REF # 1(1) REF # 2 REF # 3 REF # 4
Rating
performed :
+ Base Training
(1) Refresher # 1 can be performed in either the simulator or the aircraft ; if performed in
the aircraft, the Training Captain must refer to the Refresher Flight syllabus.
Interruption Up to 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 6 6 to 9 9 to 12 12 to 18
Above
length : 1 month months months months months months months
Refresher
New Type
course to be None REF # 1 REF # 2 REF # 3 REF # 4 REF # 5 REF # 6
Rating
performed :
Interruption Up to 6 to 9 9 to 12 12 to 18 18 to 48
Above
length : 6 months months months months months
Refresher
Recurrent New Type
course to be None REF # 4 REF # 5 REF # 6
Training Rating
performed :
23-01.fm
2.23.02
23-02.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.02 Page 2
A380 L F23
TRAINING FOOTPRINT
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
23.02
A. REFRESHER # 1
DAY 1
FFS 1
or
Flight
B. REFRESHER # 2
DAY 1 DAY 2
FFS 1A FFS 2
C. REFRESHER # 3
D. REFRESHER # 4
E. REFRESHER # 5
F. REFRESHER # 6
CBT 3:00 CBT 3:00 CBT 3:00 CBT 3:00 CBT 3:00
FFS 1A - TRAINEE 1
E
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 240 / 10 5000 OVC 005 20/10 1020 Time EVENTS
ATHR
LFLL 270 / 10 5000 OVC 005 20/10 1020
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
INIT GATE A 1 - LFZZ 15L - GW 385 t
FLT NBR A/L ID 201 Co-route AIBLYS
FROM LFZZ TO LFLL ALTN LFZZ
1 - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
CPNY RTE AIBLYS (AIRCRAFT NOT ELECTRICALLY SUPPLIED)
2 - BEFORE START
ALTN RTE LYSAIB
3 - ENGINE START
CRZ FL FL 110 CRZ TEMP -7°C 4 - AFTER START
00:50 5 - TAXI
CI 90 TROPO 36090 6 - TAKEOFF v v
7 - CLIMB FL 110 v v v
TRIP WIND HD 15
8 - FMS EXERCISES v v v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD 9 - STAR - NON PRECISION APPROACH
v v v v
(FLS) LFLL 18R
385 t 65 t 10 - GO AROUND - MISSED APPR PROC -
GW FOB v v v
847 000 lb 143 000 lb DIVERT TO DEPARTURE
11 - VOR DME APPR (FLS) LFZZ 33R v v v v
320 t 12 - GO AROUND - RADAR VECTORS v v v
ZFW ZFWCG 35 % 13 - HOLD v v v
704 000 lb
14 - VOR DME APPR (SELECTED)
NOTES v v v v
LFZZ 33R
DAY VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE 15 - GO AROUND - CLIMB FL 60 - RADAR
v v v
RWY COND DRY (SID ONZON 1S) VECTORS
AIR COND ON PAX NUMBER : 100 16 - REVIEW OF AP/FD PROTECTION -
v
ANTI ICE OFF SPEED VLS
17 - REVIEW OF AP/FD PROTECTION -
E
v
SPEED VMAX
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272 18 - STABILIZE 3000 FT v v v
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 15L / GW 385 t LFZZ 15L / GW 385 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs1A.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 2
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
FFS 1A - TRAINEE 2
E
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 240 / 10 5000 OVC 005 20/10 1020 Time EVENTS
ATHR
LFLL 270 / 10 5000 OVC 005 20/10 1020
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
TRANSFER OF CONTROLS TO TRAINEE 2
FLT NBR A/L ID 201
FROM LFZZ TO LFLL ALTN LFZZ
19 - RADAR VECTORS BACK TO LFZZ v v v
CPNY RTE AIBLYS 20 - VOR - DME APPR (FLS) LFZZ 33R v v v v
ALTN RTE LYSAIB 21 - GO AROUND - MISSED APPR PROC v v v
22 - VOR - DME APPR (SELECTED)
v v v v
CRZ FL FL 110 CRZ TEMP -7°C LFZZ 33R
23 - GO AROUND - RADAR VECTORS v v v v
CI 90 TROPO 36090 24 - ILS APPR 33R GS OUT (LOC/FLS) v v v v
25 - GO AROUND - RADAR VECTORS v v v
TRIP WIND HD 15
26 - NBD APPR LFZZ 33 R v v v v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD
IF TIME PERMITS :
385 t 65 t
GW FOB
847 000 lb 143 000 lb 27 - GO AROUND - DIR TO DIRBA v v v
28 - NON PRECISION APPR (FLS)
v v v v
320 t LFLL 18 R
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 lb 29 - GO AROUND v v v
NOTES INIT ILS APPR - LFZZ 33R
DAY VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE
RWY COND DRY (SID ONZON 1S) 30 - ILS APPR
AIR COND ON PAX NUMBER : 100 31 - LANDING
ANTI ICE OFF 32 - AFTER LANDING
33 - PARKING
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 15L / GW 385 t LFZZ 15L / GW 385 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs1A.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 2 A
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
23.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• To practice non precision approaches in automatic flight and in accordande with SOPs.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
02 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. REVIEW
• ACRM : Teamwork and communication
• Non precision approaches
• Protections with AP engaged in V/S mode
B. INTRODUCE
NIL
04 - SESSION GUIDE :
8 : FMS exercise :
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
- Review NAVAID de-selection function
- Use direct to function (DIR TO)
16, 17: Point out that AP maintains VLS (or VMAX) and V/S obtained whatever V/S selected
on FCU.
FFS1Agd.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 2 B
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
FFS1Agd.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 3
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
FFS 2A - TRAINEE 1
E
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
CALM CAVOK 13/10 1013 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
FLT NBR A/L ID 202 INIT GATE A1 - GW 385t
FROM LFZZ TO BIKF ALTN EINN
1 - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT
CPNY RTE AIBKEF PREPARATION
ALTN RTE KEFSNN 2 - BEFORE START
3 - ENGINE START (ABNORMAL STARTS)
CRZ FL FL 360 CRZ TEMP -53°C -- ENGINE 3 - START VALVE FAILS TO
OPEN - (START VALVE MANUAL
CI 90 TROPO 36090 OPERATION)
-- ENGINE 2 - START VALVE FAILS
TRIP WIND TL20 TO CLOSE - Restore
4 - AFTER START
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD
5 - TAXI
385 t 65 t 6 - TAKEOFF RWY 33R v v
GW FOB
847 000 lb 143 000 lb 7 - CLIMB FL 110 v v v
8 - SIDESTICK FAULT - Restore v v
320 t 9 - CLIMB FL 310 v v v
ZFW ZFWCG 35 % 10 - CRUISE : PACK 2 OVERHEAT then v v v
704 000 lb
11 - DOOR LEAK (EMERGENCY
NOTES v v v
DESCENT) - Restore at FL 100
DAY VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE 12 - RETURN TO DEPARTURE - ADJUST
v v v
RWY COND DRY (SID ATN 1N) FUEL 70 T
AIR COND ON PAX NUMBER : 250 13 - SLATS JAMMED (WTB) v v v
ANTI ICE OFF 14 - ILS APPROACH NO SLATS v v
15 - GO AROUND - Restore
E
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272 INIT FL 100 - GW 385t - ZFW 320t - FOB 65t
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
16 - ALL GEN FAULT v
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
17 - REVIEW OF EMER ELEC CONFIG - Restore v
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA 18 - RADAR VECTORS v v v
19 - PRIM 1 + 2 + 3 FAULT v
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX 20 - ILS APPR - DIRECT LAW v
21 - GO AROUND - Restore
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs2A.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 4
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
FFS 2A - TRAINEE 2
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
CALM CAVOK 13/10 1013 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
TRANSFER OF CONTROLS TO
FLT NBR A/L ID 202
TRAINEE 2
FROM LFZZ TO BIKF ALTN EINN
22 - CLIMB FL 110 v v v
CPNY RTE AIBKEF
23 - HYD G + Y RSVR LVL LO v v
ALTN RTE KEFSNN 24 - HOLD then RADAR VECTORS v v
25 - LANDING GEAR GRAVITY EXTENSION v v
CRZ FL FL 360 CRZ TEMP -53°C 26 - ILS APPR LFZZ 33R - NO FLAPS v v
27 - GO AROUND - Restore v v
CI 90 TROPO 36090
TRIP WIND TL20 INIT TAKEOFF - LFZZ 33R - GW 385t -
ZFW 320t - FOB 65t - CO RTE PAT 33 R
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD
385 t 65 t 28 - TAKE OFF v v v
GW FOB 29 - RADAR VECTORS v v v
847 000 lb 143 000 lb
30 - PRIM 1 + 2 + 3 FAULT v
31 - ILS APPR - LFZZ 33R v
320 t 32 - GO AROUND - Restore
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
704 000 lb
NOTES INIT APPR - LFZZ 33R - GW 385t
DAY VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE
33 - ILS APPR - LFZZ 33R v v
RWY COND DRY (SID ATN 1N)
34 - LANDING
AIR COND ON PAX NUMBER : 250
35 - AFTER LANDING
ANTI ICE OFF 36 - PARKING
E 37 - SECURING THE AIRCRAFT
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs2A.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 4A
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
23.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE
• To review main systems
• To review main failures and related procedure
• To prepare trainees for the recurring FFS sessions
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
02 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. REVIEW
• Abnormal engine start
• Sidestick fault
• Pressurization problems with emergency descent
• Abnormal slats / flaps procedure and approach
• Electrical emergency configuration and associated procedure
• Dual hydraulic system malfunction and associated procedure
• Triple prim failure
B. INTRODUCE
NIL
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
04 - SESSION GUIDE
• According to exercise, insert failure during phase of flight giving the most realistic training.
• Restore failure or malfunction either after procedure completion (single failure) or after go
around (failure which affects handling such as dual hydraulic failure, flight control problems,
etc)
05 - SESSION GUIDE :
FFS2Agd.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 4B
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
FFS2Agd.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 5
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 1 - TRAINEE 1
E
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 240/12 CAVOK 30/10 1020 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
FLT NBR A/L ID 204 INIT GATE A1 - GW 385t
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL
1 - PRELIMINARY AND COCKPIT
CPNY RTE PAT33R PREPARATION
ALTN RTE AIBLYS 2 - ENGINE START
3 - AFTER START AND TAXI
CRZ FL 4000ft CRZ TEMP 15°C 4 - TAKEOFF v v
5 - RADAR VECTORS v v v
CI 90 TROPO 36090 6 - ILS APPROACH LFZZ 33R v v v
7 - WINDSHEAR - GO AROUND - Restore v v v
TRIP WIND -
8 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD 9 - LANDING
FLAPS 3 FLAPS 3
PERF PAGE PERF PAGE
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 V2
FLAPS FLAPS
ffs1.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 6
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 1 - TRAINEE 2
E
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 240/12 CAVOK 30/10 1020 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
FLT NBR A/L ID 204 INIT TAKEOFF - LFZZ 33R - GW 385t
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFZZ
20 - TAKEOFF v v
CPNY RTE PAT33R 21 - RADAR VECTORS v v v
ALTN RTE AIBLYS 22 - WINDSHEAR - GO AROUND - Restore v v v
23 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
CRZ FL 4000ft CRZ TEMP 15°C 24 - LANDING
VR v FLEX VR v FLEX
V2 V2
FLAPS 3 FLAPS 3
PERF PAGE PERF PAGE
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 V2
FLAPS FLAPS
ffs1.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 6A
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
23.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE
• To train for the required level of proficiency crews having had a flight activity interruption on
A380.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
02 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. REVIEW
• Cockpit preparation.
• Windshear recovery
• Visual patterns
• Crosswind take-off and landing
• Engine out on take-off
B. INTRODUCE
• Touch and go procedure
Refer to FCTP Base Training chapter “Aircraft Flight Training Briefing”
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
FFS1gd.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 6B
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
04 - SESSION GUIDE
On ground :
- nosewheel down
- maintain centerline
FFS1gd.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 7
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 2 - TRAINEE 1
E
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
CALM CAVOK 13/10 1013 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
FLT NBR A/L ID 206 INIT HOLDING POINT - LFZZ 24 - MTOW
FROM LFZZ TO BIKF ALTN EINN
1 - PRELIMINARY AND
CPNY RTE AIBKEF COCKPIT PREPARATION
ALTN RTE KEFSNN 2 - BEFORE START
3 - ENGINE START
CRZ FL FL 360 CRZ TEMP -55°C 4 - AFTER START
5 - TAXI
CI 90 TROPO 36090 6 - BEFORE TAKEOFF
7 - TAKEOFF (MTOW) v v v
TRIP WIND HD 20
8 - CLIMB FL 110 v v v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD 9 - IR 2 FAULT THEN IR 3 v
10 - APPROACH TO STALL T/O AND LDG
569 t 209 t v
GW FOB CONFIG
1 232 000 lb 440 000 lb 11 - TRANSFER CONTROLS TO TRAINEE 2 v
12 - APPROACH TO STALL TAKE OFF AND
v
360 t LDG CONFIG
ZFW ZFWCG 35 %
792 000 lb 13 - TRANSFER OF CONTROL TO
v
TRAINEE 1 then restore
NOTES 14 - RADAR VECTORS TO LFZZ v v v
DAY VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE 15 - HYD G + Y RSVR LVL LO v v
RWY COND WET (SID MOU 1W) 16 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
AIR COND ON PAX NUMBER : 480 17 - LANDING NO FLAPS - Restore
ANTI ICE OFF
INIT TAKEOFF - LFZZ 33R - GW 385t - ZFW
HASE
320t - FOB 65t
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
PERF PAGE PERF PAGE 18 - TAKEOFF - ENG 1 STALL AT V1 + 5 KT v v
LFZZ 24 / GW 569 T LFZZ 24 / GW 569 T 19 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
V1 v TOGA V1 v TOGA 20 - LANDING 1 ENG OUT - Restore
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 V2
V2 135 V2 132
FLAPS 3 FLAPS 3
ffs2.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 8
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 2 - TRAINEE 2
EE
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
CALM CAVOK 13/10 1013 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
TRAINEE 2
FLT NBR A/L ID 206
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN LFLL INIT HOLDING POINT - LFZZ 24 - MTOW
CPNY RTE - v v
21 - TAKEOFF- CLIMB 4000 FT
ALTN RTE AIBLYS 22 - HYD G + Y RSVR LVL LO v v
23 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
CRZ FL 4000 ft CRZ TEMP 5°C 24 - LANDING NO FLAPS - Restore
CI 90 TROPO 36090
INIT TAKEOFF - LFZZ 33R -GW 385t -
TRIP WIND - ZFW 320t - FOB 65t
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 V2
V2 135 V2 132
FLAPS 3 FLAPS 3
ffs2.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 8A
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
23.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE
• To practice stall recovery
• To review dual hydraulic failure procedure and handling
• To review one engine out operation
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
02 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. REVIEW
• Flight control reconfiguration laws
• Approach to stall and recovery
• Dual hydraulic failures
• One engine out pattern
B. INTRODUCE
NIL
04 - SESSION GUIDE
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
8, 23 : Restore GW < Max landing weight
18, 25: After stall, insert flame out for one and extinguishable fire for the other exercise.
FFS2gd.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 8B
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
FFS2gd.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 9
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 3 - TRAINEE 2
E
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 240/25 5000 OVC 005 20/10 1020 Time EVENTS
ATHR
LFLL 270/10 5000 OVC 005 20/10 1020
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
FLT NBR A/L ID 205 INIT TAKEOFF - LFZZ 15L - GW 385t
FROM LFZZ TO LFLL ALTN LFZZ
1 - PRELIMINARY AND
CPNY RTE AIBLYS COCKPIT PREPARATION
ALTN RTE LYSAIB 2 - BEFORE START
3 - ENGINE START
CRZ FL FL 110 CRZ TEMP -7°C 4 - AFTER START
5 - TAXI
CI 90 TROPO 36090 6 - TAKEOFF (MAX CROSSWIND) v v
7 - SID CLIMB FL 140 v v v
TRIP WIND -
8 - TCAS (OPTIONAL) TRAFFIC ADVISORY v
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD 9 - FMS EXERCISES
v v v
(USE STBY NAV - Restore)
385 t 65 t 10 - TCAS (OPTIONAL) RESOLUTION
GW FOB v
847 000 lb 143 000 lb ADVISORY
11 - STAR - ENGINE FIRE v v v
320 t 12 - VOR DME APPR (FLS) LFLL 18R -
v v v v
ZFW ZFWCG 35 % 1 ENG OUT
704 000 lb
13 - LANDING 1 ENG OUT - Restore
NOTES
NIGHT and DAY VISUAL FPLN : refer CO-ROUTE INIT TAKEOFF - LFZZ 33R - GW 385t
RWY COND WET (SID ONZON 1S)
AIR COND ON PAX NUMBER : 200 14 - TAKEOFF - WINDSHEAR - Restore v v
ANTI ICE OFF 15 - VISUAL PATTERN v v
16 - ADR 1+2+3 FAULT (BUSS) v
E
17 - LANDING - DIRECT LAW
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF
LFZZ 15L / GW 385 t LFZZ 15L / GW 385 t
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX °C VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs3.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 10
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 3 - TRAINEE 1
E
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ 240/25 5000 OVC 005 20/10 1020 Time EVENTS
ATHR
LFLL 270/10 5000 OVC 005 20/10 1020
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
FLT NBR A/L ID 205 INIT TAKEOFF - LFZZ 15L - GW 385t
FROM LFZZ TO LFLL ALTN LFZZ
18 - TAKEOFF (MAX CROSSWIND) v v
CPNY RTE AIBLYS 19 - SID CLIMB FL 110 v v v
ALTN RTE LYSAIB 20 - TCAS (OPTIONAL) RESOLUTION
v
ADVISORY
CRZ FL FL 110 CRZ TEMP -7°C 21 - ADR 3 + 2 FAULT (ALTERNATE LAW) v
22 - RETURN TO DEPARTURE v
CI 90 TROPO 36090 23 - VISUAL APPROACH v
24 - LANDING - ALTN LAW - Restore
TRIP WIND -
VR v FLEX °C VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs3.fm
2.23.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE
• To be able to execute normal and abnormal procedures and handling.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
02 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. REVIEW
• Crosswind take-off procedure
• Engine out non precision approaches
• Windshear recovery
• Dual malfunction
• Landing in direct law
• Engine out visual pattern approaches and landings
• Use of STBY navigation
• Use of BUSS
B. INTRODUCE
• TCAS traffic and resolution advisories
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
04 - SESSION GUIDE
6, 18 : Select 25 kt XWIND for these 2 take-off only, then set 10 kt XWIND for the session.
FFS3gd.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 10B
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
FFS3gd.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 11
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS 4 - TRAINEE 1
EE
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ CALM 400m OVC 001 1/1 1020 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
FLT NBR A/L ID 205 INIT HOLDING POINT - LFZZ 33R -
FROM LFZZ TO BIKF ALTN EINN GW 385t
VR v FLEX °C VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs4.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 12
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
FFS 4 - TRAINEE 2
E
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
LFZZ CALM 400m OVC 001 1/1 1020 Time EVENTS
ATHR
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT
FLT NBR A/L ID 205 INIT TAKEOFF - LFZZ 33R - GW 385t
FROM LFZZ TO BIKF ALTN EINN
19 - TAKEOFF (CAT II CONDITIONS) v v
CPNY RTE AIBKEF 20 - ABNORMAL FLAPS OR SLATS
v v v
ALTN RTE KEFSNN DURING RETRACTION (WTB)
21 - ILS APPROACH - LFZZ 33R v v
CRZ FL FL 360 CRZ TEMP -53°C 22 - LANDING NO FLAPS OR NO SLATS
Restore
CI 90 TROPO 36090
INIT TAKEOFF - LFZZ 33R - GW 385t
TRIP WIND TL 25
E
INIT TAKEOFF - LFZZ 33R - GW 385t
RR Trent 972 EA GP 7272
ACTIVE / PERF ACTIVE / PERF 32 - TAKEOFF ENG FIRE BEFORE V1 v v
LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t LFZZ 33R / GW 385 t 33 - REJECTED TAKEOFF
34 - EMERGENCY EVACUATION - Restore
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR v FLEX °C VR v FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
V1 TOGA V1 TOGA
VR FLEX VR FLEX
V2 DERATED V2 DERATED
ffs4.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 12A
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
23.03
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE
• To be able to execute abnormal and emergency procedures
• To attain sufficient proficiency for the recurring Evaluation
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
02 - TRAINING TOPICS
A. REVIEW
• Low visibility during take-off
• Turbulence penetration procedure
• Dual hydraulic malfunction
• Emergency descent
• Rejected take-off
• Emergency evacuation
B. INTRODUCE
NIL
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
04 - SESSION GUIDE
6,19 : After take-off the weather should improve for next landing
9 : Enter severe turbulence and check that the crew reacts accordingly.
FFS4gd.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 12B
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
23.03
FFS4gd.fm
REFRES
REFRESHER COURSE 23.03 Page 13
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
23.03 02.08.02
Flight Training Briefing : refer to BASE TRAINING SYLLABI FCTP chapter
DAY GA TG FS NIGHT GA TG FS
Weather : Malfunctions :
1 - EXTERIOR INSPECTION
2 - COCKPIT PREPARATION (1)
3 - ENGINE START (1)
4 - TAXI
5 - TAKE-OFF - EXTENDED DOWNWIND
6 - VISUAL APPROACH (ILS SUPPORTED IF AVAILABLE)
7 - TOUCH AND GO (2)
8 - GO AROUND ALL ENGINES
9 - FULL STOP LANDING ALL REVERSERS (3)
(1) Item to be completed only by the Trainee starting the base training flight
(2) Repeat 'Touch and go' up to proficiency with the following minima :
flight.fm
REFRESHER COURSE 02.08.02 Page 14
A380 L F23
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 04 MAY 2008
02.08.02
flight.fm
LOW VISIBILITY OPERATIONS
35.01 - INTRODUCTION
35-00.fm
HUD COURSE 35.00 Page 2
A380 L F35
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
35.00
35-00.fm
HUD COURSE 35.01 Page 1
A380 L F35
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
35.01INTRODUCTION
01 - GENERAL
The HUD course provides specific training prior to performing an Operators Proficiency Check
(OPC) with the HUD deployed.
Training consists of CBT followed by FFS training in a HUD equipped level C or D FFS.
A minimum of 4 hours PF per trainee (single or dual HUD) is required to complete the course.
On successful completion of the Skill Test / OPC pilots must:
(a) Accomplish at least 25 HUD assisted take-offs in VMC conditions prior to using the HUD
in IMC conditions.
(b) Accomplish at least 25 manually flown HUD approaches in CAT 1 (or better) conditions
prior to utilizing the HUD in conditions below CAT 1 (550m).
On successful completion of the training course and the Operator's OPC, trainees may
reduce their Take-Off minima to 75m RVR (300 ft RVR for FAA operators)
35-01.fm
HUD COURSE 35.01 Page 2
A380 L F35
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
35-01.fm
HUD COURSE 35.01 Page 3
A380 L F35
INTRODUCTION
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
B. Non-type-rated-crew
One additional HUD familiarization session, in a HUD equipped FFS (or approved FTD), is required prior
to commencing FFS 2 of the Standard Transition course.
Note : The HUD familiarization session is not type related and can be done in any FFS Airbus Fly-by-wire
aircraft type.
The Standard Transition course will then be conducted as per Standard footprint.
A minimum of 5 FFS sessions will be conducted in a HUD equipped FFS.
In all cases, a minimum of 4 hours with the HUD deployed is required prior to the Skill Test / OPC, con-
ducted in a HUD equipped FFS.
03 - COURSE PREPARATION
The CBT self study is available on the trainee's DVD and must be completed prior to the
HUD familiarization FFS session. The trainee will sign this sheet and provide it to the
instructor during the briefing.
Date :
Signed :
35-01.fm
35-01.fm
HUD COURSE (LF35)
Ref. : FCTP ISSUE 05
Trainee
A380 sticker
A380
SATISFACTORY
Trainee Instructor name
Sessions Date Comments*
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
HUD
FAMILIARIZATION
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
Name |__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|__|
HUD TRAINING
May need extra training** Code |____|____|____|
HUD COURSE
INTRODUCTION
35.01
L F35
* : - Comments are mandatory when May need extra training box is ticked * *The following session MUST be assessed as SATISFACTORY or UNSATISFACTORY
- Write None if no specific comments are needed
Page 4
01 - Type-Rated Crews
Standard Crew
.
DAY 1 DAY 2
Must be completed prior to 4 hrs FFS with HUD 4 hrs FFS with HUD
FFS
35-02.fm
HUD COURSE 35.02 Page 2
A380 L F35
TRAINING FOOTPRINT
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
Must be completed prior to 4 hrs FFS with HUD 4 hrs FFS with HUD
FFS
Standard Crew
.
DAY 1 DAY 2 DAY 3
Must be completed 4 hrs FFS with HUD 4 hrs FFS with HUD 4 hrs FFS
prior to FFS (HUD optional)
35-02.fm
HUD COURSE 35.02 Page 3
A380 L F35
TRAINING FOOTPRINT
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
Standard Crew
.
DAY 1 DAY 2 DAY 3 DAY 4
Must be completed 4 hrs FFS with HUD 4 hrs FFS with HUD 3 hrs FFS
prior to FFS (HUD optional)
Must be completed 4 hrs FFS with HUD 4 hrs FFS with HUD 4 hrs FFS
prior to FFS (HUD optional)
35-02.fm
HUD COURSE 35.02 Page 4
A380 L F35
TRAINING FOOTPRINT
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
35-02.fm
HUD COURSE 35.03 Page 1
A380 L F35
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
HUD FAMILIARIZATION
TRK-FPA
WEATHER
EVENTS
ATHR
Time
HUD
33R 330/10 8000 OVC 008 23/10 1020
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT INIT TAXI FOR TAKE OFF LFZZ 33R
GW 385 t - CO ROUTE AIBAIB1
FLT NBR HUD 120
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN 1 - SHORT SET UP AND HUD
DEPLOYMENT
CPNY RTE AIBAIB1 2 - TAXI v
ALTN RTE AIBLYS 3 - TAKE-OFF v v v
4 - CLIMB FL 70 v v v
CRZ FL 70 CRZ TEMP -2°C 5 - EXERCICES IN LEVEL FLIGHT /
v v
CLIMB / DESCENT
CI 90 TROPO 36090 6 - FL 100 - NORMAL AND STEEP
0:40 v v
TURNS
TRIP WIND v v
7 - ALPHA FLOOR DEMO
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD 8 - DESCENT TO 5000 ft v v v v
0:50 9 - ILS APPR 33R v v v v
GW 385 t FOB 65 t 10 - GO AROUND - CLB 4000 ft v v v v
11 - ILS APPR RWY 33R
v v v
ZFW 320 t ZFWCG 35% CROSSWIND 240 / 15
1:10 12 - LANDING / CROSSWIND v
NOTES
RWY COND DRY FPLN : Refer CO ROUTE
AIR COND ON INIT TAKE OFF LFZZ 33R - GW 385 t
ANTI ICE OFF CO ROUTE PAT 33R - WIND 240 / 15
FFS1.fm
HUD COURSE 35.03 Page 2
A380 L F35
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS1.fm
HUD COURSE 35.03 Page 2A
A380 L F35
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
35.0302.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• To provide trainees with sufficient understanding and practical experience of the HUD in a
dynamic environment prior to either undertaking a Type Rating (APT 2) Course with the
HUD deployed, or dedicated HUD Training.
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. INTRODUCE :
• Taxi
• Take-off (including crosswind)
• Straight and level flgiht, accelerations and decelerations
• Normal and steep turns, climbs and descents
• Alpha Floor and recovery
• TCAS response
• Windshear recognition and recovery
• ILS approach
• Landing (including crosswind)
• Visual Pattern
B. EXERCISES / REFERENCES :
• FCTM - Supplementary Information - Use of HUD
• FCOM
C. SUPPORT :
• CBT
• FCTM
• FCOM
FFS1gd.fm
HUD COURSE 35.03 Page 2B
A380 L F35
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
35.03
The HUD Familiarization FFS is designed to give trainees sufficient exposure to the HUD in a
dynamic environment to consolidate their knowledge gained via the CBT. It is vital therefore
that the trainees have completed the CBT phase of the course prior to the FFS phase.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
The Instructor will need to vary the weather conditions (visibility & cloud base) in order to
achieve realistic approach conditions.
The objective of the familiarization detail is to give the trainee maximum exposure to the HUD
in a dynamic environment - NOT TO CONDUCT TYPE SPECIFIC TRAINING.
1 : The FFS should be setup by the instructor prior to the session, engines running.
HUD stowed, on the taxiway, in the take-off configuration.
The trainee should partially deploy the HUD - “COMBINER UNLOCKED” message is
displayed on the HCU (combiner). Deploy HUD and note correct eye position (box).
Taxi: Note chevrons move up as soon as aircraft moves forward. Use GS in HCU
3 : Before takeoff, observe the inverted T, offset pitch rotation symbol, which shows
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
12,5° of pitch down all engines running. The visible field of view is limited to around
5° above the horizon.
Takeoff roll: Ask trainee to make deliberate deviations from centreline. Note that the
yaw bar is a “demand instrument”. When the correct input has been applied to the
rudders to regain and maintain the runway centreline, the yaw demand will be at
zero.
During rotation, observe the inverted T moving up to the horizon and disappears at
the end of the rotation, 1 sec after FPD appears.
4 : During climb, reinforce FMA: engaged and armed modes different size. Dashed line.
Airspeed target managed versus selected
FFS1gd.fm
HUD COURSE 35.03 Page 2C
A380 L F35
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
Repeat same exercise in OP DES, then using V/S 1000 ft/mn.
9 : Use HUD as main reference whilst crosschecking with ND for situation awareness.
Set CAT 2 conditions to initiate a go around.
If ILS pb is not pressed, VOR information is displayed on the HUD, provided VOR
key is selected on either EFIS-CP.
Observe Delta Speed “carot” behaviour whilst configuring.
Show synthetic runway and LOC axis. Show FPA computed by FMS. When the air-
craft is on the G/S beam, the touchdown point is aligned with the FPA symbol.
On final, demonstrate Declutter modes (N, D1 to remove synthetic runway and Loc
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
axis, D2 to reduce speed and altitude scales, remove LOC deviations and FMA).
Show that RA size displayed below the bird is enlarged passing 400 ft.
Show that if N Declutter mode is used, synthetic runway and LOC axis disappear at
400 ft RA.
12 : X-Wind landing: The PF should flare / decrab the aircraft conventionally whilst look-
ing through the HUD. Stress the use of X-Wind mode.
Note: The HUD does not provide flare guidance but displays arrows that temporarily
pulse on the FPV below 40 ft, as “flare reminders”.
13 : If takeoff with X-Wind mode, X-Wind display is available around 50 ft after lift off.
Windshear recovery: Stress the recovery is Head Down using PFD
FFS1gd.fm
HUD COURSE 35.03 Page 2D
A380 L F35
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
FFS1gd.fm
HUD COURSE 35.03 Page 3
A380 L F35
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
HUD TRAINING
WEATHER
TRK-FPA
33R 240/10 9999 SCT 030 15/10 1020 Time EVENTS
ATHR
HUD
AP
FD
ACTIVE / INIT INIT TAKE OFF LFZZ 33R
FLT NBR HUD 120 NIGHT VISUAL
GW 385t - CO ROUTE PAT 33R
FROM LFZZ TO LFZZ ALTN 1 - TAKE OFF v
CPNY RTE PAT 33R 2 - VISUAL PATTERN v v v
3 - LANDING v
ALTN RTE AIBLYS
0:20 INIT TAKE OFF LFZZ 33R
CRZ FL 4000 ft CRZ TEMP -2°C GW 385 t - CO ROUTE PAT 33R -
RVR 75m
CI 90 TROPO 36090
4 - TAKE OFF - ENG FAIL AT 80 kt v
TRIP WIND
INIT TAKEOFF LFZZ 33R
ACTIVE FUEL & LOAD GW 385 t - CO ROUTE PAT 33R
RVR 75m - WIND 240 / 15
GW 385 t FOB 65 t
5 - TAKE OFF CROSSWIND
v
ENGINE FAIL AT V1 - DAMAGE
ZFW 320 t ZFWCG 35 % 6 - CLB 4000 ft v v v v
NOTES 7 - RADAR VECTORS v v v v
RWY COND DRY FPLN : Refer CO ROUTE 0:40 8 - ILS APP 33R v v v
9 - GO AROUND - FLAPS JAMMED v v v
AIR COND ON
10 - CLB 4000 ft v v v v
ANTI ICE OFF
11 - RADAR VECTORS v v v v
12 - VOR DME APPR 33 R - SELECTED v v v v v
13 - LANDING CROSSWIND v
EE
FFS2.fm
HUD COURSE 35.03 Page 4
A380 L F35
TRAINING SYLLABI Issue 05 FEB 2009
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM
FFS2.fm
HUD COURSE 35.03 Page 4A
A380 L F35
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
35.0302.04
01 - SESSION OBJECTIVE :
• To provide trainees with sufficient training and practical experience of the HUD in a dynamic
environment prior to undertaking an OPC with the HUD deployed.
02 - TRAINING TOPICS :
A. INTRODUCE :
• Night take-off (including crosswind)
• Night visual circuit
• Night Landing
• Manually flown ILS approaches (IMC)
• Go around (IMC)
• Non precision approach
• Declutter modes
• Flaps 3 crosswind landing
• Low visibility take-offs (75m)
• HUD failures
• Engine failure on take-off (before & after V1)
• CAT 1 manual landing
B. EXERCISES / REFERENCES :
• FCTM - Supplementary Information - Use of HUD
• FCOM
C. SUPPORT :
• CBT
• FCTM
• FCOM
FFS2gd.fm
HUD COURSE 35.03 Page 4B
A380 L F35
TRAINING SYLLABI
FLIGHT CREW TRAINING PROGRAM Issue 05 FEB 2009
35.03
The HUD training FFS is designed to give trainees specific training in order to use the HUD in
Night or Low Visibility conditions - not to conduct type specific training.
It is assumed therefore that the trainees have completed the HUD familiarisation phase of the
course prior to undertaking this FFS training.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
INIT TAKEOFF LFZZ 33R: FFS should be setup by the instructor prior to the session,
engines running, HUD deployed, on the runway, in the takeoff configuration
Highlight that pitch indication (aircraft symbol) is available around 30ft after liftoff
together with the FPD. Emphasize relationship between FPV and pitch.
INSTRUCTOR ONLY
12 : NPA selected. Stress scanning with ND for situation awareness and FCU, for
adjustment of selections.
Show runway is represented dashed as the final path is more than 2° from QFU.
Declutter when runway in sight and use X-Wind mode.
14 : Expect RTO as the regulations authorize takeoff with 75m RVR using the HUD.
Consider rejecting takeoff below 80 kt and continue above 80 kt, recovering Head
Down.
FFS2gd.fm